Cornell University Library 3 1924 031 269 404 olin.anx Cornell University Library The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031269404 IrattitEl anb Comgkte GERMAN GRAMMAR. BT AriiOV Al, TEACHES OF GERMAN, ETC. IN BOSTON. BOSTON: CROSBY, NICHOLS^, LEE & CO., 117 Washington Stbeet. 1861. & Entered according lo Acl'tafWUgl'SUU lU LUB Jiwfi 1858, by PHILLIPS, SAMPSON, AND COMPANY, in tlie Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. UNrVERSlTT Prbss, Cambridgb ; Welch, Bigelow, & Co., Electrotypeis and Printers. PREFACE. The Grammar here offered to the learners of German is intended to serve a doable purpose. It is to be a thoroughly practical book, leading the beginner in German, according to the newest and best method of acquiring the practical use of foreign languages, from the very commencement on to the perfect use of German in conversation, translation, and writing, either with or without the aid of a teacher ; and it is to be a complete system of German grammar, according to the latest discoveries and views in grammatical science, — complete at least as far as a correct and elegant use of German can be mastered by the aid of a grammar, — with a diligent regard to the German equiv- alents for English idioms. There are a considerable number of German Grammars before the public ; and among them are several that deserve no slight praise on account of the scholarship and practical utility they exhibit. We feel under obligation especially to mention the following: — 1 . Heilner's (The Grammar of the German Language, philosophically developed, London, 1841, new issue, 1851), a work full of indepen- dent and philosophically digested learning. 2. K. F. Becker's (pub- lished by his son, Mr. Bernh. Becker, in Frankfort-on-the-Main and London, 1841, second edition, 1845), — a work whose merits no one that is conversant with grammatical matters will doubt for a moment. 3. Aue's (Grammar of the German Language, London and Edin- burgh, Chambers, 1853), a meritorious work, based entirely upon Becker's system, and more complete with regard to details and to An- glicisms and Germanisms even than Becker's. 4. Glaiibensklee's (Synthetic Grammar of the German Language, New York, Ivison and IV PREFACE. Phinney, 1857), a scientific abridgment of the principles of German grammar, devised to complete Woodbury's series of German text- books. All tbese works, and many more of lesser note, follow the synthetic or scientific method of grammar, and are therefore, however great their merits in this respect may be, useful only to such pupils as abeady understand the elements of German, and those of grammar in general, from their previous acquaintance with and study of other foreign languages. It is a merit of Woodbury in this country conclusively to have shown that the scientific or theoretical way of teaching a foreign language, when exclusively practised, is too tedious to attract the youthful mind, too slow of progress to reach its aim, and too much at variance with our improved modern system of instruction. The youth must learn foreign languages, more or less, in the same natural way in which he acquires his own mother tongue. He must begin with hearing it spoken in simple, then in more difiicult and compound sentences; he must learn to understand them by analyzing and re- composing them into other sentences and periods. The pupil must learn at the same time to understand the foreign language when spoken, and to speak it himself, to read and translate the foreign tongue fluently into his mother tongue, and to write it like his own. This was the aim of Woodbury. But his system is carried too far. There are too many practical lessons, and consequently too long a preparatory period is required for the pupil to learn to translate and read German books, to converse in the language, and to master its grammatical construction. Besides, the examples chosen to illustrate the rules are often tedious and meaningless, and the thinking or anar lyzing faculty of the human mind is too little called into activity. Among those who know Mager's merits in relation to the theory of the true method of learning foreign languages, there can be no. doubt that there is but one system possible, — the practico-theoretical system, as hinted at by OUendorf, Ahn, and Woodbury, and as perfected by Mager, and even further simplified in the present work. The begin- ning is made with an eminently practical course ; the pupil hears the foreign language spoken and sees it written in a series of sentences that form a methodical gradation from the simplest and easiest to the more difficult and compounded. It is of importance that this course should not be prolonged beyond twenty-four lessons, at least not with able pupils; and that the latter should find themselves competent, at PREFACE. V the end of this course, to translate a foreign book, and to understand little stories when told in the foreign language, and to repeat them in the same. This point once gained, everything is gained; the pupil feels already his rapid proficiency, and consequently a lively interest in exerting his ovrn powers, and in studying the foreign language for himself. He can help himself along, even without a teacher, and he will progress much more rapidly than common pupils. He is now able to understand a scientific or merely theoretical grammar, and to study it with profit. For this purpose it is indispensable that the first or practical course should be well elaborated, so as to comprise all the important forms and syntactical rules of the language, and to be in itself a complete Grammar with the omission of all cumbersome details, and that all these forms and rules should be embodied in short sentences, that may be committed to memory together with the correct pronunciation of the teacher. The pupil must be made to read and to translate the sentences of each lesson, beginning with the very first, the teacher con- fining himself to corrections ; after translation comes Analysis, so that the pupil may point out the meaning of each word, as well as the grammatical form and rule embodied in it. When reading, translating, and analyzing has been repeated, if necessary even a second time, the pupil is prepared to compose new sentences from the elements of those given, the teacher confining himself to corrections and a few sug- gestions, or to furnishing the pupil with a small number of new words, that enable him to frame as many new sentences from the elements of those first given as possible. No new lesson should be commenced before the preceding one is fully mastered. Each following lesson should be calculated to repeat the elements of the previous ones as often as possible. If this method is consistently carried out, and if the teacher is never satisfied with a lesson imperfectly recited, a rule im- perfectly understood, a false pronunciation, etc., he may be morally sure that twenty-four lessons will bring his pupil or pupils to a certain facility in translating from the foreign into the mother tongue,, and vice versa, in reading all easy books, in understanding all little tales or de- scriptions in the foreign tongue when spoken, and in being able to repgat them. The second course may then begin. In this Grammar a first course of twenty-four lessons is devised, whose efficiency for the purpose mentioned the author knows through his own experience as a practical teacher. Nay, his experience has VI PREFACE. taught him that even as many as twenty-four lessons are not indispen- sable, and that the task may be performed with able pupils in sixteen lessons. The first ten sentences of each lesson are those to be trans- lated, read, analyzed, repeated, and finally committed to merijory by the pupil; the subsequent grammatical remarks are mere sug- gestions for the teacher, or for the abler pupil who wishes to learn ^ German for himself without the advantage of the aid of a teacher. They contain the rules on grammatical forms and construction embod- ied in the sentences. The teacher should not go a step further until the pupil has comprehended tlie rules. He may be able to give more of them, — he should not give less. There is no real progress in learning foreign languages until the pupil understands the reasons for each form and each combination of forms implied. No language can be perfectly learned without putting in requisition the thinking faculty' of the human mind; much less the German, — a language so much more difficult than the English. The more fundamental and thorough is the foundation of a foreign language in the pupil's mind, the more rapid is the systematical progress afterwards. The German and English sentences following the grammatical remarks of each lesson are to be translated, and care should be taken by the teacher to add a number of English sentences to be translated into German, formed out of the elements of the first ten sentences, perhaps with the addition of a few words if his pupil should not have become sufficiently proficient. This is a comparatively easy task for a teacher of average ability. The second course, as devised by the author, should be a theoretical one, continuing at the same time the practical exercises on a larger scale. The teacher explains the rules of the Theoretical Part, and exercises his pupils in understanding and applying them by English sentences to be translated into German. On the other hand, -he makes them read and translate easy German reading-matter into English, alternately telling them short stories, such as those given in the fourth part of this book, and at a later period short descriptions, which they must forthwith orally translate into English, and inmaedi- ately after, or one lesson later, repeat in German. All mistakes made by the pupil should be corrected by referring to the rule ; and at Tie end of each lesson, one or two important rules embodied in the reading matter, or sinned against in repeating the story, should be illustrated by reference to the corresponding section in the Grammar, and by a PREFACE. Vii number of examples to be made on them. The declensions, conjuga- tions, prepositions, adverbs, and conjunctions must be committed to memory, by repeating them three or four times a year, and fixed in the mind by examples. The teacher should be careful not to crowd the memory of his pupils with rules, but to have as many of them as they have learned understood fully and deeply impressed. The second course should confine itself to Etymology, and not enter on the det^s of Syntax, which remains for a third course. Toward the end of the second course, translations in wrifeg from choice English reading-matter into German, to be corrected by the teacher with reference to the paragraphs of the Grammar, should be attempt- ed. If no other English book fit for that purpose is at hand, the " Fairy Book " will do. Tales, fables, and descriptions should be pre- ferred to all other literature. The third course should have for its object Syntax, treated in the same way as Etymology was in the second. The more diflicult German authors should be read and explained by the teacher, in part cursorily, in part more fundamentally ; in the latter case the pupils have to prepare themselves with Vocabulary and Grammar for the task of the lesson, in the former case they have not. The teacher should insist that all words met with in translating, and unknown to the pupil, be committed to memory, together with the gender of sub- stantives. Oral translations from good English writers into German, always with reference to the sections of the Grammar, are indispensa- ble' to give the pupil a correct and fluent use of the foreign tongue. At the same time German conversation must be begun. To carry it on so that common platitudes may be avoided, the teacher should select a topic for conversation, taken from some German or English classic, and by adroit questions oblige the pupils to speak out their own mind and to form opinions. The study of language treated in this way, becomes one of the best means of developing the thinking faculties and propensities, and of correcting the logic of the pupil. From time to time those topics of the Grammar that were omitted in the former studies as conveying too ^any details, particularly those on the gen- der of substantives, on the formation of words, on the construction of sentences, the use of the verbals, etc., are introduced, explained, and the pupil exercised by means of examples, until, at the end of the third course, no topic in the Grammar is left untouched. Such pupils, on the other hand, as are constrained by sheer neces- via PREFACE. Bity to learn German without the aid of a teacher, and feel competent to do so, can profit by this Grammar more than by any other. They should by all means have a few pronouncing lessons, and from time to time some of their written exercises corrected, by some able German ; otherwise they would not have sufficient conversational practice. Still they will find in this book the first German Grammar at the same time practical and scientifically complete. v On this head we must say a few words. Much as has of late been done in the science of grammar in general, and in German grammar particularly, there is to-day no complete and reliable German Grammar, either in the German or in any other language. Becker's admirable works, it is true,~have reformed the whole system, and dis- closed many facts before overlooked ; but, written, as they are, for Germans, they do not mention some very important topics, — for instance, with regard to the sex and declension of substantives, the arrangement of words, the vast field of Germanisms, and the render- ing of English idioms into German. In this respect the present book is much fuller than any previous one, and, if not perfect', is at least sufficiently complete to enable the attentive pupil to correct conclusions according to given analogies. All the lists of excep- tions will, by comparison with other Grammars, be found far rich- er, and so reliable that the pupil can now, for the first time, know where the rule begins and the exceptions end. There are many important facts, overlooked in all Granmiars extant, explained and stated here for the fii-st time. We need not enlarge upon this ;'the careful resider will find it out for himself. The author owes sl, great debt of gratitude to the better German Grammars named above. On the whole, he has, in compiling this book, compared more than twenty existing Grammars. Some things that could not be said in a shorter., ajid more forcible or proper man- ner, are almost verbatim copied from Becker's English edition, Aue, Heilner, and the German editions of Becker. The author has likewise derived the whole skeleton of the grammatical system from Becker, to whose profound works any English scholar^of German who wishes to master it thoroughly must at last apply. He does not expect to incur reproach for having done so. This work bears in itself suffi- cient evidence of independent studies and views to shield him from the charge of plagiarism. Suffice it to say, that his aim was not origi- nality, — which is least of all desirable in grammatical science, — but usefulness. PREFACE. IX Some rules are necessarily given, some facts mentioned, twice, or even three times, in this book. Each of the three parts — the Practical Lessons, the TJieoretical Part, and the Syntax — forms a whole or course of instruction in itself, appropriate for three successive classes. Many pupils who cannot have J;he benefit of the second and third course will thus be enabled nevertheless to carry their practical Ger- man studies far enough for their purpose ; many others, who can afford to go through the first and second courses, will find in them syntac- tical remarks which will enable them to understand even many difii- cult German authors, and to carry on German conversation by prac- tice with Germans. At the same time, the thorough student, who goes over the whole book, will find ample and reliable instruction in all the intricacies and difficulties of German Grammar. Our thanks are due to Prof. James R. Lowell of Cambridge, to Mrs. Julia C. Howe of South Boston, to Mr. Edmund Dana of Bos- ton, and to Mr. M. T. Bigelow, the corrector at the University Press, for their kind assistance in the English redaction of this work. A. DOUAI. *ili* Owing to the fact that this work was introduced in several of the pub- lic and private institutions of Boston and vicinity before , the printing was finished) the Index and the short German Reader at the end do not appear in tlie first copies pubhshed. ABBEEVIATIONS. Sch. fc )■ Schiller. G. ' Goethe. Wd. Wieland. Hd. ' Herder. Gell. Gellert. Hdt. ' Alex. Humboldt. Jac. ' ' Jacobs. Licht. ' Lichtenberg. E. Engel. Uhl. Uhland. Luth. ' Luther. B. Bible (Luther's Translation) Less. ' Lessing. Prov. Proverb. B. Burger. GEAMMAE. INTEODUCTION. I. Rejuakks on Peontinciation. The German Alphabet consists of the following twenty-six Letters : — 31 a = A a ah ^ n JV n enn 33 h = B b bay D = e c =: tsay 5) )) ^ p P pay t) i) := D d day Q q == Q 1 koo IS. e = E e aj !ft r R r err s f =: F f eff ©f^lff := S s ess ® 9 = G 9 gay a; t = T t tay § ^ = H h hah U u ■=. U u 00 3 i =: I i ee as s) = V V fow, foYi 3 J =: ■/ J yot as w =1 ,V w vay M t z= K k kah 2e y — : ' X X iks 8 I — L I eU g) 9 = T y ipsUon Wt m = M m emm 3 3 =: Z « tset Several of these letters are similar in shape, and care should be taken not to confound them. For instance, S and 33 5 S and @ ; ^R and 31 5 D and Q ) ^ and '% ; f and f ; i) and 9 5 X and y. 1. Pronunciation of the Vowels. %, a, pronounced always like the French a, or English a iq father, are. 2 GERMAN GRAMMAR. (£, c, pronounced always like the French e or e, or English e, a, in hetter, name. 3, i, pronounced always like the French i, or English i, e, in hit, we. D, 0, pronounced always like the French o, or English o in rose, more, so. It, M, pronounced always like the French ou, or English u in bull, full. The German 9 (ipsilon) is never used as a consonant, like the English y, but is always a vowel. The pronunciation is always that of i. It occurs only in words of Greek origin, while in German words it has, of late, fallen entirely into disuse. 2. Pronunciation of the Modified Vowels. si (3le), ft, is pronounced like the French e, or English ai or ay in lair, prayer, or e in there, where. 6 (Qc)> O/ is pronounced like the French eu, or English e or ea in heard, her. U (Ue), ii, is pronounced like the French u ; the English have nothing like this sound. 3. Pronunciation of the Diphthongs. - 6i, ci, is prpnounfeed like the Enghsh y in my, why, or i in line. ®U, eu, is pronounced like the English oy in boy, or oi in oil. • %X, flU, is pronounced hke the English ou in home, or ow in now, how. %X (2leu), Su, is pronounced Uke eu. Sit, at, which occurs only in about a dozen substantives, is pro- nounced like ei. Diphthongs are always long, while all other vowels may be long or short. INTRODUCTION. 3 4. Pronuneiaiion of the Simple Consonants. SB, t, and ID, b, are pronounced as in English ; 6 in the midst of a, word like to, S, c, apppars only in foreign words, and is pronounced, before 5, e, i, 0, 9, like ts (the same as j) ; as in Safar, Seber, ©icero, S^rug, ©oleflin ; before all other vowels and the consonants, like k ; as in Sato, Soncert, Sultur, Srebit. 5, f, 9)?, m, 91, n, 9), p, Z, t, and 3£, x, are pronounced as in English. ®, g, although pronounced di£Ferently in different portions of Germany, should always, by the foreigner, be prondunced like the Enghsh ff in garden, geese; this pronunciation being e'^^erywhere in Germany easily understood. Ailer an n it sounds as in English ; as, tang, long ; ftngen, to siog. ,§, ]^, is pronounced as in English, but is never mute at the commencement of a word, or, as the German Grammar calls it, in the Anlaut.* It is not sounded after a t, as in t^un, to do, gtut^, flood ; between two vowels, as in fe^crt, to see ; or after a vowel, as in ^\i1)n, hen, ^u'^, cow ; or after an r, as in 3W)etn, Rhine ; in a word, in the midst and at the end of radical syllables and words. 3, j, (i/ot,) has the same sound as the Enghsh consonant y, in 1/ear, 3a|r ; yes, ja. ^, I, is hke the English k; but is never mute before tt. The sign cE is a double k. £2, (f, is always followed by a u ; qu has the sound of kv. St, X, is pronounced like the French and Italian r ; to wit, shriller than in English. 5*, bad, the b is, therefore, the " Anlaut," the f( the " Auslaut." A radical syllable may have two or more consonants for " Anlaut,'.' lilse SBliit* blood, fpringeti, to spring; and two or more "Auslauts," lilte ^Jiiiiftd, punch, fpringt, springs; or a double " Auslaut," lilte tamm, lamb, S8(it!,ball, butt, dry. 4 GERMAN GRAMMAR. ence between a hard and a soft s, as in French and other languages. The letters fl" and p have no sharper pro- nunciation than the simple f, but are audible as a double s, particularly so the ff, which is only orthographically diffefent from ^ {ess-Uet), occurring only between two short vowels. 35, », sounds- Uke/. SB, tu, is pronounced like the French and English v; never Uke English w. 3, 3, is pronounced like ts in gets. The letter ^ (tay-tset) is nothing but a double 3. 6. Pronunciation of the Compound Consonants. S|, (^, is a guttural, whose pronunciation resembles that of the Scotch ch in Loch, in aU cases when it occurs after one of the vowels a, 0, U, or au. The pupil must, there- fore, refer to a German teacher for the correct pronun- ciation. After one of the other vowels (e, i, ei, eu, au) or after a consonant it sounds much softer than after the above vowels. Before all vowels and consonants it sounds like h, and so it sounds when it is followed by an [ or 0. ^^, pf), occurs only in Greek words, and is pronounced like f, as in English. (5(^, fc^, like the English sh in ship, ®(^iff ; as?ies, Slfc^e. 2;^, t^, has never the sound of the English th, but only that of a t. 6. Pronunciation of the Long and Short Vowels. The German orthography is not very consistent ; still some rules may be established, which should always be observed, to facilitate a correct pronunciation. I. AU syllables are long which have for vowels, 1. aa (in about twelve words) ; as ^aax, hair ; 3lal, eel. 2. ce (in about eighteen words) ; as ©ee, sea ; ©ecle, soul. INTEODUCTION. 5 3. DO (in four words) ; 33oot, boat ; 5!Jloo3, moss ; ISRoov, morass ; !2oo3, lot. 4. te. The e is not here pronounced, but serves only to make the pronunciation of { long, in all cases except the pronouns i^r, her, their ; i|m, i^tt, him ; i^^nen, to them ; where the | serves the same purpose, and is therefore not pronounced. 5. at), e:^, tf, 0^, u|, a:§, d|, it| (the ij being mute). This ^, as the sign of a long syllable, occurs only as " Aus- laut," or before one of the " Auslauts " tn, n, I, X. Ex. 3la|m, cream r 3<'-% number; ^a^ti, cock; Ie|rett, to teach; fii^Ien, to feel; le^ncn, to lean; iRc^, roe; ja^, tough ; ^0% height ; friit), early ; ^u^, cow ; fro|, ■ glad ; nai), nigh, near. 6. One of the diphthongs ; as, au, fti, ei, eu, CM. In all other radical syllables or words, where the vowel is long, this is not made, conspicuous by orthography ; as in SSflb, bath; SBtttt, blood; 2Ccg, way; So6, praise. But their num- ber is limited. The pronunciation of long e is like that of the French e in pere, or like the. English ai and ai/ in lair, prayer, or e in where, there. This is the case in all radical syllables ending with a simple liquid for " Auslaut " ; as, tcr, the ; ton, who ; J»en, whom ; Wlt% meal ; pe|tert, to steal ; ne^men, to take (h being mute) ; and in a few open syllables ; as, Icfen, to read ; SDefctt, being ; SSefen, broom ; fc^en, to see ; ©c^ere, shears, scissors ; Qucre, bias. The pronunciation of long e is acute, and like the French e or English ey and ay in they, gray, in aU open syllables ; as, legen, to lay, put ; ge^en, togo; fle^^en, to stand ; Slenb, misery ; ebel, noble ; S!el, disgust ; and when the c is doubled or pro- longed by a mute | ; as, ^tiv, host ; SJleer, sea ; tnc'^r, more. n. All radical syllables are short which 1. Double the " Auslaut." Ex. Samnt, lamb ; enf , student, .Ruttur', culture, ®ot= tmf, soldier, Dfftjicr', officer. All verbs terminating in the infinitive in tr en have the prin- cipal accent on the I in iren, because they are of foreign origin. 8 GEHMAN GRAMMAR. All substantives in d have, for the same reason, the accent on this termination. In analogy with these two latter classes of words, even verbs in trcn and substantives in et of German origin have taken the same accentuation. Compound adverbs are in many cases excepted. For instance, adverbs compounded with ta, like ijamit, therewith, iahei, thereby, bafiir, therefor, baburc^, thereby, and similar ones, may have the accent on the syllable ia, or on the preposition com- pounded with it, just as the former or the latter conveys, in each instance, the principal meaning. Adverbs compounded with the prefixes "^irt and ^er (hither, thither) do not allow of an accent on these syllables. For the accent on adverbs, see § 63 of the Theoretical Part. The words teljcn'blg, living, alive, and 9lnf Wort, answer, and some substautives and verbs compounded with Un= and SJJi^*, are the only real exceptions to the above rules. The prefixes burc^, through, Winter, behind, hind-, iifcer, over, tinter, under, «m, around, wiber, against, ini^, mis-, ttoH, fuU-, are, according to their different value, either accented with the principal or the secondary accent. On account of the importance of this subject, we insert here what the celebrated German grammarian, K. T. Becker, in his English-German Grammar (page 4), says on the same topic. " The accent of German words is regulated according to the same principles by which that of English words of Anglo-Saxon origin is regulated. The primitive syllable, which is in general the first syllable of the word, takes the principal accent, whilst prefixes and affixes take either the subordinate accent or none at all ; e. g. SSa'ter, father crflau'nen, astonish 2Def tcr, weather crwa'c^en, awake gol'ben, golden beiuei'ncn, to bewail mac^'tig, mighty Srlaufi'ttig, allowance greunb'fc^aft, friendship Unterne|'mcr, undertaker e^ri'jlent'^um, Christendom Unternel^'inung, undertaking. INTRODUCTION. 9 "In particular, all terminations and affixes are unaccented, except lei, lein, ling, l^eit, feit, fc^aft, f^um, fal, ung, Bar, fam, l^aft, ic^t, which take the semi-accent, and ei, irett, which take the principal accent. " The prefixes Be, er, uer, ettt, §cr, and the augment ge», are un- accented; the prefixes iuri^, Winter, fiber, unter, urn, wii?er, mi^, DoU, are semi-accented, or take the principal accent according to their different value ; aJl other prefixes take the principal accent. "The personal pronouns, articles, and the monosyllabic forms of the verb fein (to be) are unaccented. All other auxiliary verbs, pronouns, prepositions, and conjunctions are semi-ac- cented." 10 GEKMAN GKAMMAK. PAUT I. PEACTICAL LESSONS. LESSON FIEST. ExEECiSE I. — ©er SSater, the father; bie Wlixttn, the mother ; baS ^int), the child ; bcr ©o^n, the son ; bie S^oc^tcr, the daughter; SBrufeer, brother ; ©i^wefler, sister; etn, a, one; in, in; tnetn, my; betn, thy; fetn, his; i^r, her; i|l, is; "^at, has; tuar, was; gut, good; [e|r, very; ni(^t, not;"jtnb, are; '^atcn, have; 1)kx, here ; bfl, there ; bag ^auS, the house ; iai 9)ferb, the horse. 1. 5Dcr aSater i(l gut. 2. ®ie 9«utter tfl fe^t gut. 3. ®a3 ^inb tft nic^t gut. 4. Wtin SSater war gut. 5. S)er SSatcr unb bie 9Kuttcr Tmb gut. 6. aSater unb abutter fmb gut. 7. «Kein ©ruber ^at etn ^inb. 8. @ein ©o'^n iji |ter. 9. Wleint SToc^ter unb beine ©(^weflcr finb ba. 10. SKeine ©^wejler f^at cin Jltnb, {■^r .ffinb ijl gut. Grammatical Remarks. — § 1. From the above sentences it appears that the German language has three forms for the definite article, ber, bie, bfl3, the first joined to masculine, the second to feminine, the third to neuter nouns. § 2. From the 5th and 6th sentences it appears that the definite article may be omitted just as well as employed, when two or more nouns form the subject, the meaning beiag the same in both cases. § 3. From the 5th, 6th, and 9th sentences it appears that the subject when formed by two or more persons or things must be connected with the predicate in plural. § 4. From the 4th, 7th, 9th, and 10th sentences it appears that the possessive pronouns ntein, bein, fetn, it;r, and all others, take the place of the article ; in other words, cannot be joined PRACTICAL LESSONS. 11 with any article. Winn, bein, feitt, t|r are the masculine and neuter, metne, bctne, feine, it)re the feminine forms of this pro- noun. Sin, a, the indefinite article, has with feminine nouns cine. § 5. From the 5th sentence it appears that the adjective, when a predicate, has the same form when connected with a subject in the plural or in the singular ; and from the 2d and 3d sentences, that it has the same form with a masculine as when connected with a feminine or neuter. This unohangeaMe ~form of the adjective is called the "predicative form." § 6. The arrangement of words in these simple sentences is quite the same as in English. The subject comes first ; the auxiliary verb or copula, or the verb, when a single form, second ; adverbs and objects, third ; the predicate is fourth. In questions, the same inversion takes place as in English, the second taking the place of the first, and the first of the second. The above ten sentences should be committed to memory, of course with the correct pronunciation, as derived from the mouth of a teacher. The following sentences, formed out of the elements of the above ten, may be orally translated, and the mistakes made by the pupil forthwith corrected by the teacher. ExEKCisEn. — 3(1 t)er SSater gut? 3fl tie 2Kutter fe:^r gut? 3(1 bas mni ni^t gut? ^ax metn SSater nic^t gut? ®tni) SSater unt 9Jlutter nidjt gut ? ^at metn SSruber ein ^int) ? 3(1 feitt ®o'§n ^ier? ®lni) nteine %o6)kv unb beinc ©c^lue^er ba ? SOIeitt aSater :^at etn ^aus unb ein f ferb. Wldm ©c^weftcr l^at {|r ^inb :^ier. £)eine Sodjter '^at ein ^aus ba. SKein ^inb i(l nic^t gut. My mother and sister are not here. Are not thy son and daughter there ? Has not his son a child ? Her brother has a house in Boston. The father, the mother, the son, and the daughter .are good. Was not the horse here ? Was not a house there ? Is not thy father very good ? My mother was very good. The child is not very good. Note. It is for the teacher to decide whether the peculiar stand-point of his pupils will allow him £6 reduce from the outset the whole theory of the arrangement of words in a sentence to the following simple standard rule: — 12 GERMAN GRAMMAR. In all of the above sentences the predicate consists of two words, itt 95»trt ill gut. The first of these words, which is always inflected, is the aiaiharg verb or copula; the second, the predicate proper, is seldom inflected, and may- consist of an adjective, as here; of a substantive with or without attributes, as ' my father is a good father ' ; or of a participle, as in ' I have been' ; or of an infinitive, as ' I shall he'; or of a noun with a preposition, as in id) gclK ill © t u It b e, I go to naught; or of a preposition, as ' I stand up: Between copula amdprecRcate aU the objects are inserted, and Ukeioise all adverbs. Wlten copula and predicate run together into ONE ivord, as in ' the bird SINGS,' ' the man died,' then the predicate proper is omitted, but everything else keeps its place. When an inversion of the sentence takes place, as in questi^ms : * is my father good ?' (he whole change c&nsists of subject and copula changing places ; everj- thing else is left unchanged. Or where there is no copula, subject and pred- icate proper change places, everything else remaining unaltered. The teacher should practise these rules and direct the attention of the pupils to them by means of a sufliciefat number of examples for them to become thoroughly versed in these two kinds of construction, before their introduction to the subordinate (dependent, accessory) sentence. LESSON SECOND. Exercise m. — 1. 3(^ 'birt (lam) inn ®rog»ater (grand- father). 2. ©u '6ijl (thou art) nteinc gute ©ropmuttcv. 3. (5r ifl (he is) metn Sniel (grandson) unt) jie ifl (she is) meine 6nMin (granddaughter). 4. SBiv ftnb ®efd)Wifler (brother and sister). 5. 3^^ feii" tJejfcr (better) aU \mv (than we). 6. @ie jinb (they are) nic^t fo grop aU H)x. 7. 3ii) \i>av fcin ®vof grop- ijater unt) tu warji fcine ®rof gropmutter. 8. ®r loair fein ©tief* fo'^n (step-son) unb fte war feine ©ticftod^ter. 9. SBir toareit alt (old) unt) it;r waret (or toavt) jung. 10. ©ie luaren immev (ever, always) fc^r tdd) (rich). The pupil should be made to inflect the Present and Imperfect tenses of fcin. Grammatical Remarks. — § 7. The second person .singular, t)U iifl, bu IBCrrft, may be translated as well by you are, you were. Among the Germans, parents and children; husband and wife, intimate friends and relations, address each other by bu. Still the pupil should, as a rule, translate bu always by thou. 3t)r is the plural of bu, and is employed when addressing several persons, each of whom would be addressed by bu. PRACTICAL LESSONS. 13 When addressing persons not connected with the speaker by- relation or friendship, the third person plural is used, the word ftc written with a capital letter, so that ©te iuarett means you were, @ie fint, yow are. § 8. The 1st, 2d, 7th, and 8th sentences show that compound substantives are in German formed, as a rule, by simply com- pounding two or more different words into one, and writing them as one word, without the use of a hyphen (as in stepson). § 9. From the 3d sentence it appears that the masculine form of a noun may be converted into a feminine one by adding in. Thus from RonxQ, king, is formed .Ronigirt, queen ; from greunb, friend, greutibin, female friend; from ®atte, husband, ©attilt, wife. In doing so, most masculine nouns, having for radical vowel an o, 0, U, or au, take the Umlaut, that is to say, they change these vowels into 0, 6, it, or 'iv. ; as, ©c^tuager, hrother-in-law, ©i^luageritt, sister-in-law; %'^ax, fool, 5l;^6rin, female fool; ^unt), dog, hound, .^uniiin, hitch; 33auer, peasant, SSSucrin, peasant-woman. Exercise IV. — 3c^ Hn nic^t bein ©o^^tt. 33ttt ic^ ntd§t bcinc SEoc^ter? SDu :6ifl nic^t nteln mxCo. 3fl cr nic^t jndtt ©ticffo^n ? 3ji fte nic^t cine ©tiefmuttcr ?' SUZein ©tiefoater ifl gugleit^ (at the same time) ntein ©(^wiegcrijater (father-in-law), ©tnt) t»ir Txx&it ©efc^wifter? ©eib t'^r ntorgcn (to-morrow) jit J^aufe (at home) ? ©ie ftnb immer jung. 3(| war feine fjreunbirt unb .^elfertn (helper). 2)u iuarjt i^re fie^rerin (teacher) unb jugleic^ t^^re 9Jiutter. @r tuar ntein ©(^Wtegerfo^rt unb :§atte (had) tin ^aug in 9tcw=iort. SGar flc ntc§t feine SfJic^te (niece) unb wax er ni(^t ntein JfJeffe (nephew)? 3Bir toaren sufammcn (together) in ©atcm. SBart i:^r nic^t fein ©rofoater unb feine ®rof mutter? SBaren fte ettpa (perhaps) ©efi^roifler ? (Ste ftnb immer gut unb wetfe (wise). iSSaren ©ie nte (or ntcmala, never) in J^artforb ? lam his nephew, and thou art his step-brother. He is my step-child, but (after) she is my daughter. Is she thy friend and teacher ? Are we at home here ? You are not better than 14 GERMAN GKAMMAK. I am {am is not translated). Are they husband and wife? I was her step-daughter and at the same time her servant (5Dicner, male servant). "Wast thou not ever my God ? My horse was very young. His mother-in-law was not a fool. Your sister-in-law and step-sister were not there. Were we not her father and (her) mother? Were you here? LESSON THIRD. Exercise V. — 1. 3(^ ^«'6e eitten SBflter in Serlitt. 2. 2Du ^ajl cinen greunb. 3. @r l§at einen SSruber, eine ©c^wefler unb ein ^inb ^ier. 4. ©ie l^at einen D^eint (or Dnfel, uncle), eine SEante (aunt), unb ein J&oug in ®t. Souig. 5. SBir %altn nteinen SSater, ntetne 9Jtutter, unb ntein ^inb gefe^en (seen). 6. 3^r l^aW nteinen ^unb unb ttteineJpiinbitt,-fetnen .Roter (male oat) unb feine ^a^e (female cat). 7. ®te ^abtn beinen 3lo(J (coat), beinen %x\6^ (table), unb beinen ©tul§I (chair). 8. ^ein (no) iBruber ijl beffer ali bu. 9. 3(^ l^atte 3loife, SEifd^e, unb ©tiitjle. 10. ©u l^atteji greunbe, aSer !einen S?ater unb fetnen SSruber, Icine STOutter unb fetne ©(^wejler, fetn .Kinb unb lein S3uc^ (book). (The pupil should inflect the three persons, Singular and Plural, of the Present and Imperfect tense of Ijabeii.) Grammaiical Hemarks. — § 10. From the above sentences it appears that the accusative case of nouns is like the nomina- tive (see for the exceptions § 27), and that the accusative of pronouns is formed by adding en to the mascuhne form of ein, fern, ntein, bcin, fein, t|r (her), unfer (our), euer (your), i|r (their) ; while the feminine form eine, feinc, ttieine, beine, feine, if re, unfere, euere (or eure), i:^re (their), and the neuter form ein, fein, mein, bein, fein, unfer, euer, il;r, are the same in the accusative and in the nominative cases. § 11. The 7th and 9th sentences show how, in a great majority of cases, the plural of monosyllabic nouns of the masculine and neuter genders is formed, viz. by adding e to the singular, and giving the radical vowel the Umlaut, where it is an a, o, u, or au ; as, @acf (bag), ©arfe j SHod, SflMe j ,i; n, fi; ml, all); those that form the plural in en never do. § 12. The 5th sentence shows that, in simple sentences, the participle past is the last word of all 'the sentence, while the 1st, 3cl, and 4th sentences show that the objects, when nouns, take their place before the adverbs or adverbial phrases, the adverbs of time and place only excepted, which may precede all objects. § 13. The 3d, 4th, 5th, and 6th sentences exemplify the rule that, when two or more nouns of different genders are enumer- ated, each one must have its article and pronoun. The Ger- man cannot translate " I have a brother, sister, and child," by 3(^ "^alt etnen SBruber, ©d^we^er, unt) ^tnti ; that would be incor- rect. But when nouns of the same gender are enumerated, the article and pronoun may be omitted after the second and the following nouns ; so that the 10th sentence would be just as correct if it read as follows : cAtx leinen 25ater unb SBruber, feine gjlutter unt) ©c^tuefler, lein ^inb uttb SSuc^ ; although it would be far more logical and elegant to say fein ^int) unt) teln Sud^, because the one is an animate being, the latter an inanimate one. Exercise VI. — ^(At \.6) ni(!^t meinett ©tu'^t unb SEifd^? .^ajl bu ntc^t eitten greunb? ^at er eine ©attitt? $at bie ^a^e etne 9Jlau3 ? 5«ein, pe ^at 3t»" (t^o) SKoufe. ^ai ber a3a(^ ,gifc§e ? 9JJcine SEante l^atte niemat« eine greunbin. ^afcen 16 GERMAN GRAMMA1J. iaix gar leine Sreuttbe (no friends at aU) ? ^alt l^r ttttfcre Serge unb Set(^e (ponds), Saume (trees) «nb ©iifc^e, Sai^e «nb giujfe gcfc'^en ? Die aBanbe (walls) f^abtn D:^ren (ears), ^afcett ®ie !citt ®etb (money) ? $atte i^ SRec^t (right) ober (or) Unrecfet (wrong)? (Was I right or wrong?) SBaS (what) f)attt^ t)tt 9cfe:^ett ? I have a step-father in Hamburg and a mother-in-law in Halle; Hast thou not a male cousin (Setter) in Europe (Suropo), and a female cousin in America? Has not your grandson two sons ? Our' sister has no child. We have three (bret) bags. Have you not seen their fish ? Have they found (gefunbeit) our money ? Had I not thy coat ? Thou hadst my dog. Had not your fnend a mother and brother ? Have you lost (sertoren) your wife ? Have you chairs and tables enough (genug)? His house had only (nur) one room. I had a nephew and a niece in England, and a brother and sister in Denmark (Danemar!). You have had (ge^a!&t) a male cat and a horse, a cow (.Rtt^, f.) and a sheep (©(^flf, n.). Their aunt, had a house and a garden (©artert, m.) in Edinburgh. LESSON FOIJETH. ExEECisB Vn. — 1. S)tefcr (this) ^ert (fellow) ^attt bett ^unb, bie Mal^t unb ba^ ©(^af. 2. 2)iefe %xa\x (woman) |atte uttfer ^inb. 3. • 3)tefe3 ^ans ifl ieffer aU iener (that) ©artctt, ober jene SBtefe (meadow) unb jcneg gelb (field). 4. 3(^ ttterbe !6alb (soon) btcfen gtfc^, btefe ®an« (goose), unb btcfeS Suc^ f^abm. 5. 5Du wtrfi jenen Sogef, jene Mul), unb j[cne« 9)ferb '^abitt. 6. ®r tutrb Sriiber unb ©(^wSger '^a'bm. 7. SBir tuerben bctne SBiigel 6atb genug :^a'6ett. 8. ^f^x toerbet l^eute eure ©attel (the saddle, ber ©attel) lakn. 9. Unfere SBiiter tuerbcn {t)re pupil) tueinte Bitterlic^. He wept many nights. She sighed (feufjen) loud (taut) and long. The powers (power, bie Wad^t) of (ijon) Europe sent him (to send, fenben) to (nac^) England. She denied (to deny, laugnen) everything. We praised the pupils (male and fe- male). You showed us (un«) your pigeons (bie SEaufce, dove, pigeon). I chased the tiger for one day (bcr Sag). Thou blamedst (to blame, tabein) his work. "We sighed for (nad)) 22 GERMAN GEAMMAK. assistance (^iitfe, f.). They showed their hands and weapons (bie SBaffc, the weapon). My grandmother clothed him in linen (Stttnen). LESSON SEVENTH. V ExEECiSE Xm. — 1. 3c§ 1a'6e tneinett Sleffen gcfud^t. 2. ^a^ bu tneine ^cffen gefe^en ? 3. 3Dcr Sowe (lion) jjat ben Slffen (ape, monkey, ber 2lffe) gcfangeit. 4 3Btr l^afien leinerr Deafen (the ox, ber DcCife) gefunbeit. 5. ^aU i|r i^nt ben ^afen (the hare, ber ^afe) gejeigt ? 6. ©ie Sowen l§a6en ben §irtcn (herds- man, ber ^irte) gejagt. 7. S5er fRicfe (giant) ^atte utele ^vart' gofen (the Frenchman, ber granjofe) getobtet (tobten, to kill). 8. 3Btr l^atten. einen SRa'btn (ber 3la6e, the raven) Qti'a'i^mt (to tame, jalmen). 9. 'Bit 3uben (ber Sube, the Jew) l^atten bie SRuflfen getaufi^t (taufc^en, to deceive). 10. 2l)x battel: ben S3ut>en (the boy, the knave, ber S3u6e) getctbelt. Grammatical Bemarhs. — § 26. The Perfect tense is formed in the same way as in English, — the pupil may describe it, — the Participle Past being formed by prefixing to the root the syllable ge (called " Augment "), and affixing t to the root" of verbs of the modem, en to that of verbs of the an- cient form. The t becomes ct, for euphony's sake, when ihe root has the Auslaut b, t, gn, ffn, (^n, bm, t^nt ; as, get6bt=ct, getaugn=et, geSab^et (bathed — J'aben, to bathe);, gejeli^n^et, gc= Drbn=ct, gcwibm»et, gcot:^ra=et, ge6ffn»et. The Pluperfect is formed in the same way, — the pupil may show how. § 27. There is a number of nouns naturally masculine, like Kicfe, £5c^fc, Sufie, &c., which terminate in e. Such have, in all cases, singular and plural, but the Nom. singular, the termi- nation en (new or weak declension). In the same way are inflected the nouns 5Wettfc^, man, .^err, master, sir, gentleman, Jpelb, hero, ®raf, count, ^axx and SE^^cr, fool, 33ar, bear, giirfl, prince, 9)Zo^r, negro ; and a number of foreign words denoting males, like 3(b»o!at, advocate, ^flnblbflt, candidate, PBAGTICAL LESSONS. 23 ^ufar, hussar, Ttonaxdj, hornet, ^axaQxap^, SEl^eoIog, theologian, Sefuit, Slcgent:, S^rann, tyrant, ^oet, and a great many more. This declension never has the Umlaut in the plural ; as, ber jtnabe, pi. bie ^no'6en (hoys) ; ter Sote (messenger), pi. i)ie Soten ; tier 3ube, pi. bie Suben. ExBEciSB XIV. — Die ^nafcen '^abm Ws (this) gemai^t. 3(^ late nie bie ©riec^ett (Greeks) unb ZixxUn Qdiebt ^ottejl bu nti^t btp SRuifen getoW ? Die Saren wnb Sowett finb geinbe (enemy, ber getnb). 3ctte SuBen ^aBen bieg gefagt. Sllle Sltcnfc^en ftnb tne^r ober weniger (less) Starren. Die 3efuiten l^alm Biete gitrjlen ermorbet (to murder, morben), SBie stele ©ctbaten (soldiers) |a6t t^^r gefe^en ? Diefe ©Haioen (slave, bev ©tiase) l^atten i^re .^evren nie gellefct. Die ©ac^fen unb 9)veupert (Saxons and Prussians) f^abm gut (well) gefo(^ten (fought). 3(| 6in (have) iueber (neither) ein ®fl(|fe noc^ (nor) etn 5)rcupe gewcfen (heen). The mothers have praised their boys. I had entirely (gang) forgotten his words. Hast thou not blamed this prince and that count ? The messengers had at last (enblii^, from Snbe, end) found their master. My godfathers (5)(Xt^e) and godmothers had praised my face (bag ©efic^t). The princesses and coun- tesses were no heroines. I have always hated this tyrant and. all monarchs. N#man has seen God. The Christians (the. Christian, ber S^rifl) have oppressed (to oppress, briiden) the Jews. LESSON EIGHTH. Exercise XV. — 1. 3(^ f>in auc^ (also) etn .Kinb gewcfen, Wir oUe ftnb .Ktnber gewefen (been). 2. 2^x fcib feine toal^ren 9Jlanner gemefen. 3. Diefe SBud^er ftnb ntetn gewefen. 4. Dag ®elb war nic^t bagewefen. 5. SSijl bu fo tange o^ne (without) Slmt (n. office) gewefen ? 6. 3(^ tuerbe biefe (bte) fd^onen Zf^'dUx (bag S^at, the dale, valley) Befuc^en (visit). 7. 2Birjl bu, obcr ttjtrb er gelber faufen (buy)? 8. @r wirb bie ^oufer unb bte Dac^er (bag Da(^, roof, from becfen, to cover) 6efe^en (inspect). 24 GERMAN GRAMMAR. 9. SBtr werbett toie bie ©otter leBett, unb i|r tuerbet ®:^ve (honor) uitb Steid^t^itmer (riches, ber Sflet(^tt)unt, -dom, tl)um) Ijcfommen (get). 10. ©te SBilber (baS 58itb, the image, picture) Herbert Berloren Qd)m (be lost). Grammatical Bemarks. — § 28. The Perfect tense of the auxiliary verb fcin (to be) is not compounded with I)a6en, as in English, but with feirt ; the same holds good, of course, of the Pluperfect. The pupil may inflect both forms in aU six persons. § 29. The Future tense is formed from, the regular and irregular verbs in the same way as from the auxiliary verbs (see § 16), — the pupil may explain how. The Infinitive takes, in simple sentences, the last place, like the participle, predica- tive nouns, and adjectives. Note. — The English language expresses the Future tense by / shall, thou wilt, he will ; we shall, you will, they mil. " Shall I do it ? " and " he will do it," may each mean two different things ; namely, " Am I (ordered, bid) to do it ? " and " will my doing it go on at a future time ? " "he is willing to do it," and " his doing it will go on at a future time." In other words, the English lan- guage has only one form for two different auxiliary verbs. In German the Future tense is always expressed by it^ toertc, never by id) Wid, ill) fod (see §§ 33 and 36), and the pupil should carefully notice this. § 30. A minority of monosyllabic neuter and masculine nouns take in the plural the termination cr (with the Umlaut in aU cases), instead of e, and must, therefore, be feefuUy committed to memory. The following masculine nouns have er t 9>latttt, fflBalb, Sei6, body, ®et|l, spu-it, SBurm, worm, Stanb, edge, ©troui^, shrub, Sfleic^t^um, and S^rt'^um. The following neuter nouns have ert ^tttb, Sorf, village, 3tmt, Stfltt, leaf, Suc^, 5Reft, getb, ®etb, S)ac^, ga4 drawer, %'^al, Meib, dress (cloth), 3linb, bullock", Mali, calf, Sieb, song. Stab, wheel, S3ab, bath, ©c^tof, castle, lock, ©(^wert, sword, gamm, lamb, ^aug, 2Bei6, wife, 5Bi(b, Sanb, SBanb, ribbon, 9)fanb, pawn, 3;uc^, cloth, S3ee(t, beast, ^aupt, head, ®xaS, ®Iag, 8o(^, hole, 9(a8, carrion, ©t, egg, fjaf, vat, cask, ®ra6, grave, ®ut, good, ^u^n, hen, chicken, Moxn, grain, corn, Mxmt, PBACTICAL LESSONS. 25' herb, 'Ma\xl, mouth, SleiS, twig, SSotf, nation, people, ©emitf^, mind, ®e|t(^t, ©efpenjl, spectre, ®ef(^(ed^t, family, sex; also all terminating ia t^Utn, and two in mat ; as, Sigt^um, bishopric, ©eittmal, monument, Oajlmal, collation. § 31. The 2d and 6th sentences show that the adjective assumes the termination in en, when foUowing a pronoun or article ; this it does in all cases, except the Nom. singular (see § 35) ; or, in other words, it assumes the terminations of the new or weak declension. § 32. The prefixed syllable Be (see 6th and 8th sentences) renders neuter verbs transitive : lac^en — tetoc^en, to laugh at ; fcewetnen, to weep for ; Befprei^en, to discuss (from [preii)cn, to speak) ; Bege^ert, to commit (from gel;en, to go) ; bereben, to persuade. Exercise XVI. — SGerbe ic^ bte tueif en Metier Belommcn ? ®u loirfl anbere (other) Solfer fe^en. Sr t»tvt) neue Sieber |ttt= gen, SBir tnerben fd)arfe (sharp) ©c^wcrtcr*f(^iBingcn (to swing, whirl). aCerbet i^r btc SSogcInefter fcefingcn? SDie J^ii^ner hjerben @ier legen (to lay). Sin ic^ nic^t fro^ (glad, from freuen, to rejoice) gciuefen ? ©ie SSaumBIatter unb .heifer unb ©riifer unb ©trau(I)cr unb ^riiutcr finb no^ (yet) geflern (only yes- terday) griin (green) gewcfen. Seine 3rrtpmer maren fetn UngliicE (®Ht(J, n., good luck, Ungliicf, bad luck) getoefen. ©lefc Braunen (brown) S^iic^er ttjaren »or^et (previously) rot| (red) getoefen. We shall get guests (ber ®ajl). I shall visit these old graves. Wilt thou laugh at these calves and lambs, bullocks and worms ? He will visit foreign (frentb) nations. Will you discuss the families (®ef(^Ic(^t), principalities (giirjient^um), monuments, and castles of this country (biefeS SanbeS) ? They will draw all the beautiful faces and heads, villages and coun- tries, which they shall see. We shall take (ne^men) warm and cold (fait) baths. We made wry (fc^icf) faces (SUaut). These glasses have holes. The woods have never been so fresh and green as this year (bag 3a:^r). You have improved (gebejjert, 3 26 GERMAN GEAMMAK. from fieffern) your bodies, but not your minds and spirits. Tou will break (jerBrei^en) these wheels. Good husbands (^Kann) will always have good wives. We have grown (bauen) many grains. LESSON NINTH. Exercise XVII. — 1. 3(^ WiU ni(^t mtf^x tnac^eit, aU i^ (tna^en) ntuf . 2. 2)u wiEjt itid^t na^ (to) granfrcic^ ge^^en ? ®tt muf t. 3. ®r tBili i»te bittere Slrjttet nic^t ntf^mm, ttel(^e er ne|men muf. 4. 2Cir luotten ni(|t me1)x ©prad^en (language, tie ©proc^e) lernen, aU jptr burc^auiS (absolutely) ntiiffen. 5. 3|r Sl^oren iuoEt biefen grof en gcller Begc'^en (getter, m., the fault, from fe'^lctt, to fail) toelc^ert i^r nic^t Begel^en tnup. 6. ©iefe firasett SItern (parents) woflen ©iic^er fur i:^re ^inijer !aufen, welc^e fie nidjt taufen tnitjfen. 7. 3(^ niu^te nid^t trinten, aber t(^ wotltc. 8. ®u tnuftefl granjoftfi^ fprcc^cit, abtx bu jBoHtefl ntc^t, 9. S)lr wcife Slrjt (physician) tuoUte i:^m ieine jiarten (strong) 5)itten geiett, after er ntu^te. 10. SBtr woHtett etnen guten aBein cber ctn gute3 SSier trinlen 5 after it)r wotttct nic^t, unt) tttir Jitupten iai fdjtec^te (f(i)Iec^t, bad) SCaffer (water) fc^Iuden (swallow). Grammatical Remarks. — § 33. The above sentences exhibit the inflection of the Present and Imperfect of the irregular auxiliary verbs toollen (to be willing) and jniiji'en (to be obliged). The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future do not exist in English, but they do in German, because this language can form a participle, gemuft, gcwollt, and an Infinitive, muffen, wotlen. 3d^ l^afte gemu^, I have been oWiged to ; 3c^ werbe ge^en muffen, I shall be obhged to (I shall have to) go ; 3d^ l^aftc geiBoItt, I have been willing, I have intended to ; 3c^ Wcrbc tBoHcn, I shall be willing to. § 34. From the 1st, 3d, 4th, 5th, and 6th sentences a new arrangement of words appears : aU ic^ ntac^en mup. 1. Sub- ject; 2. Object and Adverbs ; 3. Predicate; 4. Copula. This arrangement takes place whenever a relative pronoun or a PRACTICAL LESSONS. 27 conjunction commences a subordinate sentence. The follow- ing are examples of such conjunctions : (xlg, as, when, iia, as, since, because, ajeil, because, bap, that, cSgleid), although, ttenn, if. § 35. From sentences 3d, 4th, 6th, 9th, and 10th it appears how the adjective terminates in the nominative of the singular, when connected with a definite article or an adjective pronoun, to wit : ber toetfe Strjt, tie Mttere Strjenef, bag fi^Iet^te SSoffer, the two latter being aJike in the Nom. and Ace. cases. Exercise XVIII. — 3d^ wiK bid) (thee) m(^t baju (thereto) Bcreben. 2Btrfl bit tDoHen, bap ic^ btc^ Beroeine (bewail) ? @r jcirb fein ®elb fiir bicfen ©tenjt (service, from bieneit, to serve) neljmen iuoHen. Sr :§at i^n gctobtet; n \at ti ni_d)t gemupt, fonbern er 'ijdt ti gciBoHt. aSilljt bu :^ier fi^en? 5»etrt (no), benn (for) \&j mvL^ bort ft^en (sit). Die gute grau tooUte eg (it) nt(^t gejie^eit (confess, avow, from jie^ctt, in the meaning of to be known, in which it is obsolete), after fie ntupte. i!Ber tBottte tuo^I l^cutgutage (now-a-days) Sanbgiiter fieft^en? 5^ tnupte i:^rt Men, fo oft aU (as often as) er getoBt fein woHte. 2Dtr tnoUen in JebeS (every, each) 8anb ge^en, t»cnn tvix miiffen. 3^r miipt bag Blaue Siwmer (room) Bewo^nen (from tuo^nen, to dwell, to live), Sorgejlern (the day before yesterday) niuptet i^t bag gelfte ftewo'^nen. Sag arme ,Kinb mupte fterben (to die). 2)er fc^warje (black) ^engji (stallion) mup gut (well) rennen (to run). T>u ntu§t einen SUo'^ren nii^t weip tvtaf(|en wollen. Must I now (je^t) shoot (fc^tcgen) ? Thou needest not (do it), if thou wUt not (do it). The poor (arm) fellow' (23urfc^e) is half dead (|alWobt) with fear (tior guvc^t) ; he must have lost aU his courage. We must die, even (felfcj^, fogar) if we will not. You must not stand still. Will you visit the sick (frant) child, or will you not (do it) ? It is so easy (feic^t, light), you must comprehend (Begreifen, from greifen, to gripe, grasp) this sentence (ber ©a^, from fe^en, to put, to state). I had to go, but was not willing to (do so). Thou didst intend to sleep (f(^(afcn). Thou wast obliged to confess it. The next (niidijl, 28 GEKMAN GEAMMAK. from naf}, nigh) consequence (golgc, f., from folgen, to follow) was, that he was obliged to &ee (fliel)en). We wouM not obey (Befolgen) these wise teachings (Sel^re, f.)- This nice (^iibfc^) tree has fallen (tji gefatten) ; I have felled (fallen) it ; I have had (to do it) ; I was not at all willing (to do so). Thou wilt perhaps (ijtetlek^t) be wUlisg to go, but thou wilt not be com- pelled (to). She said that she had been obliged to marry (|eirat|en), although she had not been willing. LESSON TENTH. ExEKCiSE XIX. — 1. 3c^ foil gelorc^ett (obey, from prett and l^or^en, to hark, listen), aber ic^ lann nidfet. 2. S)u fotljl wt|[en (to know, — the root preserved in the English wit, to wit, wit- ness) bap bu fc^Ied)t lefett !annfl. 3. 355o8 ber ad)te (genuine, from adjtcn, to deem, to esteem) Ttann foH, bag fann er and). 4. SCir lonnen 'Dai fi^were (heavy, grave) SSerB^ec^ett (crime, from 16red^cn, to break [law]), iveldjes iuir gejle^en fotten, nii^t gejle^en, 5. 3^r fottt cure Sltern ni(^t bcltigen (deceive by lies, from liigcn, to lie), aud) (even) wcnn itjr tiinnt. 6. 2)ie ^nabm Ion* ncn bte unwtfen (ripe, rcif) griic^te (fruit, bie gruc^t) nic^t geniepcn (to eat, from nit0, useful), ml^t fie geniepen foHen. 7. 3^ tcnnte ioieleS ®etb geminncn (to win, gain, — the German root winnen is obsolete) ; aber mein iBortnunb (tutor, guardian, jpl. SSormunbcr) wottte, i(| fotlte tS nid^t. 8. S)u tonnteji eS wentgjienS (at least) wiffert, obex wir lonnten cs feineStDegg (by no means). 9. ®r follte cin ®ebtd)t (poesy, from bic^ten, bcnicn, to think, to feign) l^erfagett (recite, from I)er, hither, and fagen), er lonnte eg afccr fo wcnig, aU bie 3lnberen cS fonntett. 10. 3i^ IjaU iiieirt Sebett lang (all my lifetime) gefonnt:, toaS id) gefottt f)abi, unb tuerbc immer !onncn, ttias i(^ fotten werbe. Grammatical Remarhs. — § 36. This lesson shows the forms of the two irregular auxiliary verbs fotten and !Snnen. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future tenses are analogous to iuotten and miijfert, § 33. 3c^ fottte is sometimes translated 'I should,' oftener 'I was to,' 'I had to,' 'it was my duty to'; as, ic^ ^(At PKACTICAL LESSONS. 29 gefollt, it has been my duty, or my fate ; i(^ tucrijc foffen, I shall have to, it shall be my duty or fate ; id) fonnte, \&i l^ate gelonnt, I was (have been) able to, etc. 3c^ fann is often equivalent to ' I understand,' ' I know how to ' ; as, t(^ lantt lefen, I know how to read. § 37. Derivative verbs and nouns are formed by the prefix ge, this latter not altering the meaning of the root at all, or only intensifying it ; as, gewinnen, gejie^cn, genief en, grtraud^en (from iraud^en, to use^ — root in the English to Jroo^), ®etV)inn, m., genau, accurate, precisely (from nal§), genug, etc. § 38. The word fc^Iec^t in the 2d sentence has the ftinction of an adverb. Almost all adjectives in their predicative form may be employed as adverbs. §39. The 7th sentence shows that the adjective, when not preceded by an article or pronoun, must assume the inflection of the article in all cases ; as, guter SBetn, because of ier 2Bein ; gutc Wni(5^t (t^un, to do, may as well be omitted). 3Bir fottten bal Unrec^t !6cfennert (confess), fonnten eS tt foKft nii^t e^e'6ted)en (S^c, wedlock). You say, I shall commit no misdemeanor (SSevge'^en) ; but I cannot do it, even if I would. Nobody (SRicmant)) is obliged (to do) what he cannot (do). I know somebody (3emani)) who could toot read aloud, when he ought to do it. Thou canst laugh at my words, when thou shouldst weep ? Thou shalt be my steady (jlct) friend and companion (SBcgteiter, from 6e«gc4ettcn, to lead). Can a mere (6Iop) ghost (®et|l) have real (»al)r) arms (ber Slrtn) and legs (baS 93etn, bone). Shall a maUcious (Boi3) enemy rob (icrauten, from rauten) our fields, and plunder (pliintern) our houses? We could not easily deceive (tciufc^en, ictriigen) her (fie). You should not forget everything (which, toai) you have learned. "We have not been able to order (BcjleUen, from jlellen, to put, place) what (it) was our duty (to do). A noble (eiel) life can do.no harm (^arm,.m.). Thy long coat shall be short (furj) hencefoith (^tnfort). His lame (la^m) leg could not but (nur, not but) stumble (jlolpern). Our strong arm should adjust (fc^tt^tcn, from f(^ttc^t, slight, simple) that. Why shall we wait (warten) for (auf) her? LESSON ELEVENTH. Exercise XXL — 1. 3<^ «tig (may) fprcd^crt, Wai i^ Will, t(^ barf (dare, must) !etn ncueS Mlti'D erwarten. 2. S)u magfi: ti eriangen (attain), ' obit bu barffl (must) bann nlc§t jaubcw (tarry). 3. (£r mag ein grower 9Kann fein, abcr er barf (ought) bamlt (thereof) rttc^t pxafjUn (boast). 4. 2Btr bummcn (bumm, dumb, dull, stupid) SJlcttfc^en bitrfcn (are permitted to) crreic^eit (reach), toai ttJir wiinfi^cn, after wlr mogen nic^t. 5. ^f^v biirft (are permitted to) fc^njimmen ge'^en (g6), after t'^r mogt tS nld^t ttiagen (to risk, to wage). 6. 3)etn fd^wac^er (weak) SIrnt unb ml^ii (weak, soft) ©emitt:^ ntogen erjagen, \oai unfer flarfcr 8cl6 unb i^ofjtx SO^ut^ nli^t fecrfu^cn (to seek, to try) burfen. 7. 3c^ moc^te letfe (low) fprcc^en, h)ie id) iootlte (how low soever I might speak) ; er burfte tcitt elnjigeS SEort »erne:§nten (per- PRACTICAL LESSONS. 31 ceive), ober cr wurbe (became) wilt) (wild, enraged). 8. T)tv graue (gray) ^ut (hat) moc^tc mir tt>ot)I (well) fte^en (fit me), olJer tc^ burfte i^n nii^t tragcn (wear). 9. Dfimol)! loir ei geburft |a6en, twir ^aten eS bennoc^ (nevertheless) nic^t gemoiS^t. 10. 3t;r tuerbet bag neue Sieb entweber ntc^t ftngen biirfen, ober ttic^t fingen mogcn. Grammatical Remarks. — § 40. SJJijgen and bitvfett are the last of those verbs which, together with woHen, [otten, !onnen, muffcn, fein, l^aSett, and tecrben, and eight more exhibited in § 89 and § 94, may be said to be the only irregular ones of the Ger- man language. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future are anal- ogous to the four former. 3(^ :§a6e geburft is often translated by / have been allowed to ; id) ^aBe gemo(i)t, / have liked to ; and analogously the Future. § 41. Derivative verbs are formed by the prefix er, which gives to the root the meaning that its aim has been attained to. For instance, langen and teic^en, to reach, to tend, to extend, ertangen, erreic^ert, to attain to, to reach the object of our desire ; werten, to enlist, to sue for, to try to get, criuerfictt, to earn, to gain ; icigett, to hunt, erjagert, to hunt up, to catch ; tragen, to wear, carry, ertragen, to succeed in carrying, to endure. The prefix Ber imparts to the root the contrary meaning. Being at the bottom of Bor, for, and fort, forth, it distances, destroys, makes undone the meaning of the root; as, »ergeffctt, to forget, from getting and guessing ; Berfe^en, to blunder, to miss a thing; s>erber6en, to spoil, and to be spoiled, from bartert, to be in want ; »erlieren, to loose, from tcer^ log, loose, empty ; Uertre^en and uergc^en, to commit wrong. Less distinct is this meaning in oerjie^eit, to understand, Btrfuc^ert, scme'^ntcrt, uertragen, to endure, uerkngen, to demand, ask, feerfpred^en, to promise. § 42. ®er neue .&ut, to which {t)n refers, is a masculine ; therefore the pronoun referring to it must be in the masculine gender. Thus it is with the feminine gender; bie SieJe ifl gittig (kind), fte (it) tt)ut (does) Sfliemanbent l8ofe«. 82 GEEMAN GBAMMAR. ExEKcisEXXn. — S)u barfji nlc^t gtau'Bett (believe), bag ic^ t)ir feinb (or grant, averse) tin. ©r ntag immer f^ncll kufen, i>ai errettet (retten, to save, to rid) i^n nid)t. Wo^k^ in tDiJTen, ipie id) tnic^ Beftnbe? 3^r n»09t t'en'^ett »"« i^i^ ^o% i(^ i)erad)te (despise) cure ©ebanfcn (thouglit). Slrfieiten mag i^ nic^t, unb ju tettetn (to go begging) fi^dme ic^ mi(|. 3'^r ntoi^tet nur tie ©ai^e (sake, thing) nic^t red^t (right) Bebenten (consider, revolve in your mind). Sr tttO(^te Siigen liter Sitgcn crbenfen, bag fonnte i|m nic^t ju ®elb uer^elfen. e tiiE Stofen ntit bent getten (yeUow) SBanbe (ba« Sanb, ribbon). 2. ©r Banb bte SStunten, welc^e JDer ©iirtner fc^on gebunben ^atte, noi^ einmat (once more). 3. ®r fanb, wag bu nirgenb ftnben Wtrji, tuarme greunbe. 4. J^afl bu bent armett Sater fcin uerlorenes ^inb tcieber gefun= ben ? 5. ®tc ^fitct fc^winben (decrease, vanish) bent ernjlen 9)^anne raf(^er, aU jte bent frro^^en .^naben fc^wanben. 6. Der ©c^nee (snow) if! »or bent l^eif en (hot) SBinbe in einent ^m (moment) tterfc^iBunben. 7. £>ie 9Jlab(f)en winben t^rent tie6en Setter ilriinae (ber Mxani, wreath), fo fd^iin ioii fte noc^ leinc wanben. 8. SBtr 1^abm ber Mutkx, unferer t^euren SJZutter, Sfumenjlrauf e (ber ©traup, nosegay) jum ©cBurt^tage (birth- day) gewunben. 9. ®te SBpget ftngen im SBatbe fo fc^on, wte 4 38 GEBMAN GRAMMAK. pe ttoi^ nie gcfungcn f^abm. 10. S)ie IBdrbcn fangen, i^ fang, i>u fcwgll, er fang ; tcir fangen 3ltle. Grammatical Remarks. — § 61. Here we have the old form, or, as it is less properly called, the irregidar form of the verb, according to which many of the most common verbs are inflected. The Imperfect and Participle assume a modification of the radical vowel ; as, Binbett, Bant), geBunben ; pngen, fang, gefungen ; the former omits, at the same time, the t characteristic of the Imperfect, and the termination of the first and third per- sons of the Singular ; the latter assumes, instead of the t, for termination an en ; as, ic^ fang, er fang, gefungen. In the same way are inflected fc^inben, to skin, flay (fc^unb), gefc^unben; tiingen, to bargaiu, bung or bang, gebungen ; brtngen, to urge, brang, gebrungen ; getingen, to succeed, gelang, gelun= gen; flingen, to soimd. Hang, gefiungen; f(|Itngen, to shng, swallow, fc^Iong, gefc^tungen; fc^wtngen, to swing, fc^wang, gefc^wungen ; fpringen, to spring, fprang, gefprungen ; jwingen, to force, jwang, gejwungen; ftnten, to sink, fanf, gefunfen; trinfen, to drink, trant, getrunfen ; Beginnen, to begin, fiegann, tegonnen ; gewinnen, to win, gain, gewann, gewonncn ; rtnnen, to run, gerann, geronnen ; ftnnen, to meditate, fann, gefonnen ; fpinnen, to spin, fpann, gefponnen ; fc^wimnten, to swim, fd^wamm, geff^wommen ; and lommen, to come, lam, gelommen. § 52. The above sentences show the Dative of the singular of masculine and neuter substantives. The article has bcirt and einem, and the adjective pronouns assume the same termi- nation ; as, ntetnem, beinem, feinem, unferem (or unferm), eurcm (or euerem), t^rem ; btefem, jenent, folc^em, toilc^em, feinem, jebcm, manc^em, etc. The adjective has en, the weak or modem declension, when preceded by an article or pronoun. But when not preceded by them, it must assume the termination of the article em, instead of en ; as, bem guten SSater, einem armen ^tnbe, btefem reic^en SKanne, but gutcm SCajfer, ebtem SBetne. The reason is, that the sign of the Dative must somewhere appear. PRACTICAL LESSONS. 39 § 53. The Dative of the singular of the feminine is inflected as follows : the article has t)et, einev, and so have the adjective pronouns meitter, beiner, etc., biefer, jeiicr, letner ; and the adjec- tive has en, when preceded by an article or pronoun, when not, it assumes the termination of the article er, instead of en ; for instance, bet guten. Wlutttv, einer fd^onen $ani), biefer armen grau, but guter SKili^, retner Sutter. § 54. The Dative of monosyllabic masculine and neuter substantives terminates in e; the masculines and feminines of more than one syllable generally have no inflection ; the same holds good of all feminines. § 65. The following prepositions are always connected with the Dative: auS, from, out of, aufer, besides, out of, 6ct, at, near, fiinnen, within, mit, with, na^, after, to, iteBfl, together with, feit, since, ijon, from, of, ju, to, at. § 56. Here we have two compound nouns, SSfuntenjlrau^e- and ,®e6urt^tag. On acconnt of euphony in the first instance' the word Stume has entered into the composition with its plural- form, the latter with a euphonic g. Exercise XXVIII. — SCit . ^a'6ett Itcfien (seven) ^nec^te (knight, servant) gebungen (hired). @r bringt in una, bag t»lr t^m boareg ®elb (cash) gefcen fotlen. ®ic Seinbe ftnb in bit ©tabt gebrungen (invade). @r brang wt in bie ?!JJitte (midst) beg ^(Xufeng (heap, crowd). (£g .gelingt ntir 9lto. Ss ifl bent atic^ter (judge) gelungen, was Jfliemanbem. no(^ getang, ben SBer* Bred^er (criminal) ju entberfen (discoVer). 2Bie fltngen bie ®Io(fe» (bie ®Iocfe, bell) fo fc^on ! [i^iiner aU |tc sjovgejlcrn (the day before yesterday), ja fnay), aU [it jemals Hangen, ©ie 3te6en (bie dieU, vine) f(^Iingen |ic^ an bem SSaume in bie.Jpo^e (up- wards). ®r serfi^Iang bas Stot mit feinem Sfuge (bag 9luge, eye). ®ie wurbe son ber :^o:^en SGeHe (wave) aerfc^Iungen. SDie 8am- mer fprangen an bem Jpiiget (hill) auf unb 06 (up and down)., 5)er BBfe ^na'6c tjl ubex einen Breiten ®raben (ditch, from grakn,, to dig) geftsrungen. 3^ swang metnen SRaS^hat a" cinem 33ertrage (contract). Unfere ^offnungen (bie J&ojfnung, hope) finb tmmer 40 GERMAN GKAMMAK. ttefcr (tief, deep) gefunten. 3c^ trant SBajfcr ani (out of) ber :^oI)Iert (hoRow) $ant)» ^a6t it)r nic^t Bon meinem fceflen aCeine getrunlen? SBir beglnnen unfere Strteit mit cinem frozen ©pruc^e (sentence). SGurben ton bag granjoftf^e tegonncn l)aben, mkn toit anberg getonnt? Der STOorgcn (morning) iegann ntit fc^6» nem SBctter, ber 3lbenb nttt f^te(^tem. 3Ber :^at ben ^JretS tei bent <5(|et6enfc^tegen (bie ®(^et6e, target) getDonnen ? ©ie u jlie|(fl bent lieSen ®ott bie ZaQt ah, uni er jiic^U ®elb mie ein Staie, 6. ©er S)te'6 (thief) fla^I biefen 2euten jtuolf a^mcr, unb nad^bent (after) er fte geflo^Ien |atte, empfatjl er jtc^ freunbllc^ (took leave, empfcl)len, to recommend). 7. ©efcert ifl feliger (more blessed) aU ^ttij' men. 8. 5fJimm geinben itld^tg, gefc^meigc benn (much less) beinen gteunben, 9. 3*^ na^ni ben SieBen SlfleS iuieber, tt>os fte tneinen (Ettern genontmen fatten. 10. Jpttf un«, ivf» l^elfen bir eirt flnbereg Ttal 5 iuer Slnberen '§alf, bent toirb nsieber gel^otfen. Grammatical Remarks. — §. 57. The above verbs of the old form, iefel^Ien, jiel§Ien, ncl^men, and -^etfen, are in their Umlaiii similar to those of the Fourteenth Lesson. One irregularity is shown here in the second and third person singular of the Present, and in the Imperative, the e being umgelautet into i or ic. Thus are inflected empfe^ten,.to recommend, bu emt)firf)Ifl, er tmp^ti)lt, Imperat. entpfte'^t, Imperf. tmp^a%. Part, empfo^tcn ; geBSren (to bear children), gefiter, geBflr, geboren ; geltcn (to be worth), gilt, gait, gegolten; fc^elten (to scold), . fc^ttt, fc^alt, gefc^olten ; fiergett (to cover, hide), 6ttg, Sarg, geborgen ; fterfcen, pir6, flar^, geflorfcen ; uerberfien (to spoil), i3erbtr'6, sevbarB, Ber:» iovhm ; werkn (to sue for), wirB, mti, geworkn ; werfen (to 4* 42 GEEMAN GRAMMAR. throw), totrf, warf, getuovfen; In^m (to burst), :6trjl, Ux% gefiorflett; te^cn, Wc^, •6ra(^, gcfiroc^en ; fprec^en, fprid^, fprad^, gefprot^en; jletien (to sting), (lic^, jiac^, gejloc^cn; erfi^redcn (to be frightened), crfi^tid, erf^taf, erfd^rocEctt ; treffen(to hit), triff, traf, getroffen. §"68. The dative plural of all substantives, adjectives, and adjective pronouns, and of the articles, has n or en, the former when the nominative of the plural had already an e, the latter when not ; when the nominative plural has already an n, the dative does not add one more ; as, ben gutett SSatern, ben guten grauen, ben guten ^tnbcrn ; biefeu' armen ^nafcen. , There is not a single exception to this rule at least. § 59. The English he — who is rendered by ber — Welc^er, seldom by bet — tuer or berjenige weli^er, the former being often omitted; as, iser Slnberen ®uteS t|ut, bent tl;un fte mieber ®uteS, ' who does good to others, to him they do good again ' ; Wer flie'^tt t|l ein Diet, he who steals is a thief. The definite ar- ticle is often employed as a relative or a demonstrative pronoun. Exercise XXX. — £mpfet)len ®ie ml(^ biefen ^erren. £ef= ftng gilt Diet tei ben Deutfc^en. ©ie preu^ifc^en Stealer gelten au^ in 3lmerif(X. SBag gatt ber Suf(^et ^artofeln (potatoes) ? @ie fi^ettert mic^ ol^ne (withoiit) ®runb (ground, reason), ©d^itt ntd)t tuieber, wenn bu gefc^olten loirfl ; au^ S:^rtflu3 fdjalt ni(|t jpteber, toenn cr gcf(^oIten ttarb. 3c^ '6itt iw 33erlin geBoren. ©etne brei 2Bet6er geljaren tCjm jwblf ©iil^ne unb breije^n a;o(^tcr. ®r l^itft Jeinem UnglucEUc^en ; alex luir |oIfen alien, bie ju un3 tamen. SBir jlerten nur elnmal, befl^aK (therefore) jlirt getrojl (consoled, from the root Zxo% m., trust). @r ftart sierjel^n ZaQt nat^ ben geiertagen (holidays), ©cig ©etratbe (the grains, from tragen, to bear) ijerbarB auf ben getbern. SQixh unt (for) bie Srflut, unb bn mirji fie erwerBen. T>u tuirffi mtt grof en ©teinen (m., stone) nac^ SJtenfc^en, bie bfc^ nid)t geworfen laBen. ®ic ^anone (gim) Barfl son totetem ©c^iefen. 33rt(|, armea .&erj (heart), ba (since) bein Sinter (m., anchor) geBroc^en ifl ! ©o fpro^ er unb bantte (to thank), Brac^ bag SSrot unb gaB cs i:^nen. PfeACTICAL LESSONS. 43 2Bir ^o6en wit beti SSerfoIgern (persecutor) gefproc^cn, fyxi^ nii^t iadtn nttt t^nett. Sr trof it^n in's ^erj. He who will (ittotten) learn to command, must first (er(l) learn to obey (ge'^ord^en). The older brothers commanded their younger ones to hide what they had stolen. He broke his father^s (must be rendered ' to his father the ') heart. Leah bore to her husband (fiJJann) Jacob ten sons, and Eachel bore him two. We recommended to the gardener and his wife coffee (.faffee), and to his children milk (Sfftil^-, f.). He died half an hour (efne l§atBe ©tunbe) after (nac^tem) he had taken the poison (®ift, n.). The Greeks said to Diagoras : Die, Diagoras, for all thy desires (2Bunfd§, m.) are fulfilled (crfitHert) ! Live so as thou wilt rejoice to have lived when thou diest. They broke the door open with a club (.Settle, f.) Achilles hit Hec- tor with his large spear {ie SBaffe, weapon) fctneS ©cgnerg (adversary) fo fi^nett bap er 6etna|e (nearly) flog. 3. 25te f^onen STage beg ©ommera ftnb ijerflogen, unb unfere SieBen |ttib un^ entflo'^en. 4. 3c^ iitf^t (draw) eitten ©plittcr (splinter) aui ber iSJunbe beg armen ^inbeS 5 i(^ gog borige 2Go(^c funfgein '^erauS. 5. SBir finb In ben le^ten Slagen biefeg f^axkn SQinkvi son Soflon auf %as Sanb {or nai^ bent Sanbe) (country) gcjogen (to move). 6. Sr Bog (bend) bie ©ifctt^ange (iron bar) 44: GERMAN GRAMMAK. ntit ber ©tarfc citteS i'owm ; krei wnferer Seutc lonntctt pe nidjt Biegcn. 7. 3c^ |a6e einmal getogen, ofcer fceim SBarte (beard) ieg froi3:^eten ! ic^ tiige ni(^t roiefeer. 8. T)cr ®ot)n biefer ormen SBittwe (widow) ielog uttti fcctrog Sebermann (everybody). 9. e3 ®arten« jog unb f(^o'& feinen .Sarren (car) fetfep:. ©ie tuog jtDct 55f"ni» (n. pound) gritnen ,Saffee« ab (off). 3e met)r wix Bcrloren bejlo met)r gctoann cr. ®r f^at ben SJBeDcn bes wilben 9Jleere3 ©tiUftanb geBoten. ©er :^ein9e Saurentiug wurbe, tote man fagt, in Del (oil) gefctten. Sll« bo8 SBoffer auS bcr SBaffcru'^r geflopn tear, war eine ©tunbe toerflojfen. 35er IBefannte (acquaintance) ntetneS g}?anne3 geno^ fec^jcl^n :^artgefottene (£ier in ber 3eil eine^ 2Iu= 46 GERMAN GRAMMAR. QtribMti (moment, from '6ticfen, to glance). 3tIS tftS Det fptt, gof er eS ntit ^iilfe ciner SKagb aui. SBir fc^offen nte^reve ^ugetn (ball, tie ^ugel) in ben ©tamm (stem) jeneg altett eic^:= iaumeS (oak, We Sic^e). ®er ^rei3 war gefi^lojfcn, unti ier Ijletc^e (bleak, pale) ©unfeer iroc^ ^tnein. 3tt wenigctt ^flac^ten ijl bt^er ©traui^ 6iS 3ur §i3^e einer ret(^lt(^en (ample) SEe (ell, yard) flufgefprojfen. 2)a etn gcjl Befc^Ioffen worfeen mar, fo f^tog tier ii^xtx bie ©c^ule. ©s uerbrof iie SSormunberin ie^ ^nakn, ia^ tie ©trafe (punishment) i:§n wlrHic^ getroffen |atte. SBo^itt i|t er gefroc^en ? in bas ^inttx'^aui beg Sflac^BacS. Whither has the crowd of boys fled? They fled thither (bort^tn). We concluded (fi^Iicpen) a compact (ber 33unb) of friendship (Jrcunbfc^aft, £, with the definite article). The night- ingale (9tad)HgaU, f.) flew into the bushes of the hedge (JpecEe, f.). They drew the swords from their sheaths (bte ®(^eibe). Pie was drawn through the ice of the frozen brook. The nephew of the present minister (5)farrcr) has lied and betrayed his acquaintances. The bow (ber S3ogen) was so much bent that it broke to pieces. The twins (3tt'iUing, m.) of this young woman weighed together (jufammen) seventeen (fieBje'^rt) or eighteen (atoe^n) pounds. We were ushered (fc^iefcen) into the room of the young girl. Each of the butcher's (gtetf(I)ev) oxen has lost from nineteen (neunjel^n) to twenty (jtoanjig) pounds. She offered me twenty-one (ein unb jwanjig) dollai-s for twenty-two pounds. The niece of the miller's (SJliiUer) wife boiled ham (©(^infett, m.). The river flowed over into the city. We have enjoyed (gente^cn) much pleasure (SSergnitgen, m.). He poured oil into the fire. Much blood was spilled (oevgic^en). LESSON SEVENTEENTH. Exercise XXXIIL— 3c^ tann breigig ^funb wit Sei^= tigfeit (ease) I;el>en (to heave, lift) ; fonjl (formerly) Ijafie i6) uierjtg ge:^o6en, ja man^mal f)o'b i6) funfjig. 2. 53eneIo))e folttc ein ©etueBe son grower SSnge unb SBreite tueten ; a6cr ioflg fie M Sage gewofien ^otte, lofle (te !&ei ^ad)t luieber auf, 3. T>ai PKACTICAL LESSONS. 47 Sicr biefer.SSrauer .(brewer, from fcrauen, to brew) wiU ntd^t ga^ren (ferment) c8 ^at fe^r wenig gegolrem 4. S^ ifl etne ©ettcn'^ett, baf ®d)a^t fpater al^ im iKat gefi^oren (to shear) toerben ; t»ir fd^ercn bie wnferer ^erren im Slprit. 6. 2Bir ^atteit auS ©umtnl)eit unti ®(^nja(;^t)ett elnen @il> (oath) gefc^tuorert (to swear) ba^ wir nte wleber f(|»6rett woHtett, 6. gr fonntc »ov funb S^dtx ; ein Dollar gente, a dollar's worth of cents ; fc(^3tg ©tiiif (pieces) ^irfc^en ; brci 5Kaf SCeijen (wheat). § 70. The 1st sentence, fonft ^a'6e ic^ gelofien, shows that an inversion takes place in German, when an adverb (or object or predicate) is taken out of its proper place after the copula, and for the sake of emphasis placed at the commencement of the sentence. Subject and copula then exchange their place, exactly as they do in a question. Compare, 3(^ bin nun fevttg (ready), with 9lun tin id^ fertig ; 3c^ fjobt bie ^u| gemollcn, with !E)ie ^ul) |a6e ii^ gemolfen, nidjt bie SifQC' § 71. The definite article is often contracted into one word with a preposition ; as, im ^= in bem, 3um= ju bent, »om z= »on bent, am = art bem, Beim ^ Bet bem, jur == ju ber, in'S = in ias, auf 3 = ouf bag, bur(^'3 = burd) (through) bag, iiber'S = ubix ias, unter'g (under) = unter 'nai, ijov'g =: sor bog. PKACTICAL LESSONS. 49 Exercise XXXIV. — ©er ©trom iji gefdjtDotlen jum Sftanbe. ©ie aBunbc fd}tt)iUt an. Die Srifen (pea) quetten im aBaffer, fdjon ftnt) fie ju grower !DiiJe gequoUen. ©ag Stei (lead) fdjmitjt otn geuev c'^er aU ba^ S'ttJt (pewter), unb wcnn eS gcfi^motjett ijl, i|l ea ijom fc^iinflen ©ilBevweip. ©er 3Scrrat:^er fcehjog it^tt 3U einev ©i^Iei^tigfeit, natiirtic^ (of course) 'i^al er tt)ti flud) ju aHevIci (all kinds of) SE^or^^eiten iewogen. ©er SBeLer I)at; if;t tin OetDflnb (garment) jutn gejle gewo'ben. Sllte gegoI)renert ®etran!e (liquors) ftnb tuegen (on account of) gtei(|er ®d)oii» lic^teit (gen.) serBoteit (forbid) ffiont Srl^a'&enen (other form for er'^o'ben, sublime) 3UiTt Cac^erlic^en (ridiculous) i^ nur eitt ©t^ritt (pace, step), ©te fc^moren aUi %xkn neuer unb alter gibe. SBor ^alti eriofd) baS iidjt (light), gv flid)t fid) Btii^enbe (blooming) ^ranje in'S-^aar, (Geibel.) Sifc^ ctuS, ntein Sic^t, auf eiDtg (for ever) ani ! {Burger.) ®ie gisSBIumen am fjettfler 3evfd)mDl3en, ©ie .^drte bev .^evjen ntup buret's geuer ber ^otl) (need, misery) gefd^moljen Werben, ©ie ^erjen pnb burc^ ben Suftgug (draught, from jictjen) ijertofd^cn. ©er ©ougltng fog btc gcmolfene 3icgenmltd) niit sjieler 2CiDig!eit (willingness), gr foff \i&i unter'g ®rag. We fought in the heat of the sun (compound) with great violence (Jpeftigfett). Yesterday I thrashed rye (^orn or 3iog« gen) of great value (Oiite). These beautiful girls intertwined their hair with garlands (® change) of roses (comp.). 'The horses of the neighbors snorted like elephants. He thrashed the grain (.ftorn) to pieces. The river swelled over its bank (Ufer, n.). Seventy pounds of rice (Sftet^) are soaked (queHen) in pure water, and afterwards (nac§t)cr) fermented, until they become of (Betommen) an agreeable (angenetjm) sourness. A stream of melted ores (Srj, n.) sprang forth from the volcano (SSuIfan) and was extinguished in the sea. He screwed the boards (SBret, n.) together with a screw (©c^raul&e, f). 50 GERMAN GRAMMAR. LESSON EIGHTEENTH. Exercise XXXV. — 1. Unferel)eimifc^en (home) Serge licgcrt noc^ (still) wo jtc Jamais (at that time) lagen unt) imnter gelc^gen 'i^aim, 2. 2)tt Bittcfl (beg) um ©nabe? unto ttefen iiebifi^cn (5d)urlen (rascal) '^ajl bu barum ge'6eten ? oc^, i^ Bat i^n aus iinbifc^er 2lng^ (anxiety). 3. SGir fafen (sat) tra ®runen, t»o juir fo oft gefejyen ^oten uni» audi) gegen (towards) 2IBenb werben loir ba ft^en. 4. SCir treten (step) in ben ®ii)atten (shade), tritt ntit ung in bie Saufie (bower). 5. Sr trat (step) tior|id)tig (cautiously) auf 5 o^ne feine SSorfic^t wiirbe er fluf eine giftige (poisonous, from b03 ®ift) ©c^tfxnge (snake) getreten fein. 6. Stu3 geinbfc^aft gegen mic^ af, ober sielme^r (rather) fra^ (freffen, is eating, of animals) cr 2lUe3 auf, ioai iH) tteistii^ nid^t gegeffen, fonbern aufge^ofien (to reserve, spare) ^otte. 7. Slu3 Seforgni^ einea SSetrug^ nto^ iS) bie Seinwanb (linen cloth) no(^= 'maU (once more), otfc^on t(^ jte jtpetmal gemeffen l^atte (mejfen, to measure). 8. ®ein ©eba^tnip ifl ju fc^wad^ ; cr ucrgipt SlHeS ; gejlern aergaf er feine SJJii^c (bonnet, cap) oft fc^on :^at er fein J&emb (shirt) sergejfen. 9. ®ein SBeft^ttjunt {or 23efi^, m.) war )jrac^tig (^ra(i)t, f., pride, brightness, magnificence), ic^ fa:^ a sielmal^. 10. 3?ergif ni(^t, ntir fiir meinen ^ujlen (m., cough) ettoa^ mitju'bringen, unb fie:§, toai c3 ^tuH in ber ©tabt gicbt (what news there is). Grammatical JRemarls. — ■ § 72. The above kind of verbs of the old form comprises also the following verbs, all of them having the Umlaut also in the second and third person sin- gular, and in the Imperative : lefen, licS, laiS, gelefen ; gcfi^e'^cn, gefi^ie:^, gcfc^a:^, gefc^e^en, to happen ; geBen, giefi, gab, gcgefeen ; genefen, to recover, — gena«, gencfen. § 73. Adjectives are derived, by the affix ifi^, from 'names of persons ; as, !nc(^tifi^, f !la»ifd), slavish, weiljifc^, effeminate, finbifc^, childish, biebifc^, thievish, l^errif^, imperious (all of them expressing something blamable) ; — from adverbs ; as, l^eim, l^eimiff^ ; — from names of countries and places; as, cnglif(^, PEACTICAL LESSONS. 51 frflttjojtfd^, franiff^, fi^ottifc^, beutf($, f(^webif4 fiilntfc^, of Cologne, tcrtinifi^. By lid) from abstract nouns ; as, Sngfltid), anxious, friet)U(^, peaceftd (ber grietc), c^rtic^, reblic^, faithftil, jo|rIic^, taglii^, gefol^rtic^, dangerous (tie Oefa^r), a^djmlid), horrible (3I'6f(^eu, m., from fi^euen, to be shy), gtucEtic^; a6pd^t=^ lid^, intentional (tie 9l6jtd§t) ; — from names of persons ; as, mcinn* li(^, manly, male, t»eiMi(^, feminine, female, tinbtid), child-lilte, Briibcrlii^, brotherly, fiinigtic^, royal, Saterlic^, fatherly, paternal, ntutterlic^, etc. ; — from adjectives ; as, 'dWidf, elderly, riitt)Itd), fc^toarjlic^, reddish, blackish, Mntlii^, sickly, fii^Iid), sweetish (some of them in a diminutive sense) ; — the following are used as adverbs only : erfirif^, firstly, folgltc^, consequently, freilii^, it is true, fitrjltd^ or ncultd), lately, tveitlic^, faithfully, gansttd), entirely, fc^tuertti^, hardly, [i^erli^, surely, toai)vlid), indeed, and some others. § 74. Abstract substantives are formed from names of persons by the affixes fd)aft and t^um; as, greunbfc^aft, ^crrfdjaft, ^nei^tfc^aft, S8itrgcrf(^aft (the body of citizens), giivflent^um, S^rijtcnt^um (Christianity), SBiSt^^um (bishopric); — and by the affixes ttif and fat or fet from verbs and substantives; as, ©ebod^tni^ (memory, from benten), SSebiirfntp (want, from Bebitrfen, borljcn), J&inbernif (obstacle, impediment), ©c^icEfat (fate, from jc^iden, to send), SRcit^fcl (riddle, from ratten), etc. Those in f(^aft are all feminines ; those in t^um, fat, fet are all neuters ; those in nip neuters, with a few exceptions, as bte ginjiernip (darkness), bic 33ctrii6nxp (affliction, from trii6e, dark, sombre). § 75. The prepositions burc^ (by, through), fiir, gegcit, tuiber ^against), o'^ne (without), urn (about, around), axe always con- nected with the accusative ; as, burd^ iai ^auS, fitr ben SKagen (stomach), gegen atte gei«be, iuibcr ntein ©rtoarten, o^ne atteg ®etb, «m etne SBaarc (for a ware) :^anbetn (to bargain). § 76. The following prepositions are connected with the dative and accusative : in, in, into, an, at, on, auf/ on, upon, l^inter, behind, ttor, before, neien, near, by, uUx, unter, jwifc^en ; with 52 GERMAN GKAMMAE. the former when the action expresses locality, with the latter when it expresses direction ; as, tier SSogel fliegt i n iai ^auS, when the bird was out of the house ; ber SSogel fliegt i n bent §aufe l^tn unb ^ei-, when he is confined to the house ; ic^ ge^e auf iDen 33crg, when I was at the foot of the hill ; i^ gc|e auf bent SSerge, when I am pacing the mountain. ExEKcisE XXXVI. — (£g liegt mtr rm'^t am ^erjen, aU ei bir lag. ©ie fiff, whist- . ling ; ^nijf, pinch, trick ; ®rlff, handle, seizure ;. ©tri(^, stroke ; ©(^li^, ruse; Wta^ {n.), measure ; gra^ (m.), feed; ©c^wur, (m.), oath; ©(^ur (f.), shearing; ^ut, lifting; ®erU(^, smell; SBerbvug, grief; ©prof, sprout; ©c^Iup, conclusion; ©C^uf, shot; ®uf, casting; ©ettuf, enjoyment; 5Iuf, river; 3lbfub, decoction ; ©ebot (n.), commandment ; SSerlufl, loss ; grofl, frost ; %lviQ, flight; SLrug, deception ; Sug, lie; S3ug, how; I, theft ; Zvant, drink ; ©ejlant, stench ; ^taang, com- pulsion; ©ang, song; ©(^mang, shock ; ^fang, sound; ©rang, throng; 2Gan5j, wall; ©rf)«nt>, trash; 33anb, volume; ^iei, blow ; @(I)iet), partition. They are masculines, with very few exceptions. Such of them as assume, when thus forme^, an e or t for affix, are feminines ; as, t)ic ©titge, ladder ; Hi ®a6e, gift ; tic Cage, condition ; ©pracf^c; gu^^re, load; ®ru6e; gtud)t, flight; 3uc^t, raising ; 2Bu(^t, impetus-; SSuc^t, bight ; ®c'6urt, birth. Other such derivatives are formed from the Participle Past ; as, ^dun'D, confederation; guttt), finding; ©i^Wunt), decrease; ©(^loung, swinging ; ©prttttg, leap ; SIruttf, potion ; 3Bttrf, throw ; 93ru^, fraction ; ©pru(^, legend; ©patt, split; ©d)tag, blow; Irtuf, call ; ©tog, shock ; Sauf, course ; ®elaf , space ; ^atig, in- clination; gang, catching; Jpatt, hold; %dU, fall; ©(^taf, sleep; fRatI), advice ; Saben, ®ro'6en, Sraten. All of them masculines. The feminines among them are formed with the termination e or t ; as, .giiilfe, ftnfunft, arrival, ®e6urt, birth. Others are formed from the Present ; as, ©c^ctn, shine, ©tetg, path, SBerblelB, abode, ©t^rel, cry, gteig, diligence, 3Scr= fdjietg, sale, ©treit, dispute, Sell), n., ©i^, seat, ©d^tnelj, enamel, ®ef[ed)t, n., ©d)recEen, ©tii^, S3efeI;I, ®mim, SBeginn. AE of them masculines, except the few marked. The feminines among them are formed with the affix e or t ; as, 9)flege, care, ®tWtbi, web, grflge, question, ©palte, fissure. PEACTICAL LESSONS. 61 galte, fold, 2Baf(^e, wash, ZtaQt, S8a|re, barrow, SErad^t, habit, SBtafc, blister, SBeife, kind, SSitte, prayer, ©i^raute, screw, flic^t gu crlennen, id^ gcf)e mic^ U;in ju empfcljlen ; and ic^ ienle auf ifteifen 3U gc^en ; i^ gtaufee, bie aBa^r^eit ju fugen. § 92. The above nine verbs (gcTjen excepted), when employed in the Perfect and Pluperfect tenses with an Infinitive depend- ing upon them, are never employed in the form of the Parti- ciple, but assume the form of Infinitives ; as, ii^ ^aii rebcit mogen (not gemod^t) ; er '^at fpielen biirfen (not geburft) ; feu |aft ejjen f onnen (not getonnt) ; |Ie f^at lefcn miiffen (not ge» mupt); iuir f)aim ficja^len ttjollen (not gcwoUt) ; i|r ^attelr' fragen folfen (notgefotlt); id) '^atte i^m arbcitcn l^elfett (not gd)olfen) ; wir fatten ftc ftngen I)oren (not gel;6rt) ; l^fitten wir cud) tanjen fct)en (not gcfel)eti) ! § 93. The following prepositions govern the genitive : Wcgen, '^alier, on account of, because of; laut and jufolge, according to; tro^ and ungeae^tet, in spite of, notwithstanding; mitteig and Uermittelfl, by means of; langg, along; t»at)renb, during; vtn= iont, not far from ; jiatt, anjlatt, instead of; fraft, by virtue of; Uermoge, by dint of; urn — tBtUen, for the sake of; biejlfcit^, on this side of; jenfeit^, that side of, beyond; olex^alb, above; unter^tb, below; tnner^alb, inside of; au^ex'^di, outside of. %xo^ and langS occur sometimes with the dative case. Exercise XLIV. — ®e^e (ge^) tnir ani tent SBcgc ! ©e'^t (Surer 2Bcge ! SBie ge^t ei eu(^, wte tji e3 jett^er (all the time) gegangen ? (gg giug serjweifeU (desperate) fc^Icc^t. ®el)f es t>tr wo% fo frcut eS ntic^ ; ge:^t eg Ux iifcel, grantt H tnii^. ( Old Popular Song.) gg gtng i^m tpie c« 3ei)em gct)t,t)er thvai meiflcrn tDill, mwn er nic^U serfle^t. {Pfeffel) ©er 2;i)oter gejiflnb feine S^at 2BaS ^aBen ioir gettjan, ba^ wir ^Ben |ler» ten foHen ? S)u '^atteft bir nic^t tnlt Sug unb Srug 'tjelfen tniiffen. patten wir bir fotten flie-^en '^elfen ? T>vl :^ail bie ©lodcn lauten (chime) '^oten, a'fcer nic^t bie ©olbaten marf(^tren fef)en. Set Uc6ea:^oter '^atte gefi:el)en foltcn. SBaS bu winjt, bflf bir tit Seute f^utt follctt, t§ue it)nen aui^. 64 GERMAN GRAMMAR. What has the cat done to thee, that thou dost not let' her alone (ge'^en). Houses are standing beyond the mountain also. A mill {Wix^le) stands on this side of the brook. Out of town (auper^alb) there are (eg gtett) no stone buildings (®e* Biiube, n.). No trees have been allowed to stand inside of the walls. He had intended to help him by means of a rope, but he was not able (to) on account of the noise (Sarm, m.). Be- low the powder-mill (powder, ^ulvtv, n.), a palace (5)a(a^, m.) stood. An. order was given (mitflfen) that it should be pulled down (nietierreipcn, Pass.).. I heard him cry ; he cried for (nac^) help. I heard a mouse scrambling (rafd)eln) above the ceiling. For God's sake, do him no harm ! I saw him riding along the alley (®ang) of nut-trees (nut, 9^up, f.). I have seen him walking not far from the tower. LESSON TWENTY-THIRD. Exercise XLV. — 1. SSringett @ie tnir ieit erflen, jtueiten, brittett, sicrten unb fitnften Sanb btefe^ 2Qer!eg aug bcr Siii^erci (library). 2. Den fe(I)j'ten, fieknten, ac^ten, neuntcn, je^nten, etften uni jtoBIften Brai^te i(S) S'^nen geftern ^eruntcv (down). 3. "Dm tiretjetjnten unt) tiicrjcl^ntcn, 3Wan3igjlen unb etnunii3Wan* jigflen, ^untertjlen uni) ^unbert unb erflcn f^abm ©ie mir itoc^ ntc^t '^eruttter geirai^t. 4. 2Bir betiten bariiBer na^ (reflect on), d6 (if) bu ben jwetunbjttianstgllen Dftofier 'i)m fein fannjl. 6. SBag :^ilft ti, bflf it)r nac^benft ? toir bac^ten frii'^cr aj:^, cS fci mogtic^ (possible), ioir 'i^abm eS altx u6erbad)t unb cingefcljen, bflf eS unmiiglic^ tfl. 6. 3(^ biid^te, bu irac^tcfl ben ^tnbcm ctwflg tnit. 7. 3ltg bag geuer Brannte (to bum) nanntefl bu bte .^i^c uncrtragtii^ 5 je^ ba es nic^t ntet)r Brennt unb langjt nt(^t nte^r getvannt ^at, nennjl bu bie Maitt unauafletjlic^. 8. SO'Jflrt ^at i^n einen 5Rarrert gtnannt, weit et jebcr ©cC^iirje (apron) nac^ronnte, er rennt aBer Uo^ ben :^u'6fd)ert SJlabd^en nac^, !ann man ifim bag scrbenten (find fault with) ? 9. 3(J) fenne i:^n bcr 55er[on nai^ 5 bent 9lamen nad^ f^a'bt ^ xf^n nie gcfannt ; unb wen tc^ etnmal tannte, ben crfenne i6j immer roieber. 10. PKACTICAL LESSONS. 65 SScrtenncn Sie mic^ nid^t (misjudge), oBioo'^t ic^ ntic^ f^ulbig 6e!enne. Grammatical Remarks. — § 94. The combination of the Um- laut with the terminations of the new form in the above verbs also takes place in the following : rennen, to run, rannte, ge« rannt ; fenben, faitbte (or fenbete), gefanbt (or gefcnbet) ; and tnenben, to turn, ioanbte (or tvenbete), gewanbt (or gcioenbet). The Subjunctive is, ic^ ira(^te, bai^te, trennte, fennte, nennte, rennte, fcnbctc, loenbete. § 9 a. All verbs compounded with prepositions, nouns, adverbs, adjectives, &c., in a word, all compound verbs, except those compounded with the inseparable prefixes, Be, ge, ent, cntl?, Uer, jer, rntf, Dott, t)inter, wiber, are separated from their first components, and the latter thrown to the .end of the sen- tence, when the verb is a Present or Imperfect or Imperative, and the sentence a simple one (not dependent on any other or subordinate one) ; as. 1. ^i) dciiigc bas S5ii$ Ijeriinfti; {briiige icl) bas SticI) (jtrmitev) ? 2. 3c!) btacljtt ba* SBitt^ (ictiiiiter (btadjtc ttlp ba^ SSiul) Ijefimttt) ? 3. SSringe (briitseii ©ie) iAi SBiit^ Ijcniiitev. 4. 3c|) Ijabe (Ijatte, IjntK) iai Sucl) Ijenintcvgebcac^t. 5. 3c!) iBevbe (mScbc) baiS Stitt l)cnintcrt>viiig«it. 6. gt luiU, bdf itl) bas SSiic^ Ijcvimtetbvingc. 7. S8t5c!)te tc!) ba^ SfSticI) l)tviiiitcr, fo ttuge et cs Iriebji: Ijiitmtf. Inseparable Gompoimds. 1. 3(1) Ijirtterbttiige ba* S3iic^. 2. 3ci l)inteir()rac^te ia^ fSutI). 3. ^iittttljringcn ©ie iai SSitc^. 4. 3c!) Oabe (OStte) ba* SSiicl) l)tntecfirac!)t. 5. 3c^ »»etbe baS SSiic^ Mntcrbviiigcit. 6. fft l»i((, bafi icl) iai SStic!) Oiiitcrbtiitgc. 7. .f)iiimi)tac()te ic^ baS Sue!), fo (rSge n H letcbct I)iiiaiif. § 96. The same use obtains with the four prepositions, bur (^, Utrt, u'6er, and unter, when the main accent or emphasis lies in the prefix ; but when it is upon the verb, no separation takes place ; as, 6* 66 GERMAN GKAMMAK. Inseparable. Separable. Sttl Sitrdpfuetje' bit Sitcjetet. 3cl) fit^ie burcj) ba* ganje ^mi* I)iiibiirc|) (bucd)'fiicl;en). 3(() iimarmtc' ben ttstttn Sreuiib. St iitmmt ben SRantel «m (um'iietjntcn)- 3c|) ubetlcgte' (consider) bcii (Scbatiten. St fsftte mit bcm SBootc utet (uljet'« feftcn). fjd) tiiitetfiufet' (support) metiit Sltertt. St legte ciit SBtatt ^A^itx uiitcr (utiter'" (egen). § 97. The German Subjunctive (see 5th sentence) is made use of only when the action expressed has no real existence, but exists only as an idea of some one. This is chiefly the case : — 1. In oratio ohliqua, viz. after verbs having the meaning to say, to mean, to declare, to think, and when the words or opinion of somebody are related ; as, er fagt, bap cv in SSerltn geiccfcn fei ; ic^ tneine, bap er bieg nid^t get^^ait ^aBe ; tc^ ^'ixt bap cr Irani fei ; er erja^Ite, bap er son 9lom nad^ SReapel gereifl joare, aU er ge^ort |atte, bap bcr 9)apjl gejlorien ware, unb er fei bep^alB juriicfgereiji. 2. After verbs expressing a wish or an inten- tion, and after bantit, in order that ; as, x6) iuilt bap bit gufrieben feifl; cr ttea^bfic^tigt, bap tc^ Satein lerne; id) wolte, i(| toare tobt, 3. In conditional sentences, when the contrary of what is real is asserted, either in the Conditional, or in the Subjunctive of the Imperfect ; as, toenn ic^ ®elb t)atte (but I have no money) ; fo tpurbe i(| Slicker laufen (but I do not buy any) ; iparejl bu reic^ (but thou art not) ; fo gafeejl bu ben Slrmen ttxodi (but he does not give to the poor). Exercise XL VI. — S93er iitierfcringt bcm Sotcn btefen S3rtef, bamit er i^n bem (Smgfanger (receiver, addressed person) it6cr= gcBe? ©tt toiflfl bap er ®ute3 son btr bentc ? Slbcr bann ijl ti not:§tt)enbtg, bap bu ®uteg f^uep. 3Bir fcebad^ten ntc^t, bap er ba* songerannt ijt. gr fanbte unb rannte feI6(l na(| eincm Slrjtc, t»cil er glaufite, i^ flurte (or toiirbe flerfien). SGenn er bo(^ gingc, ic^ ba(i)te, er ware tefc^Smt genug ! Sr '^at fid^ ganj unferen geinben gugewanbt; er nimmt neue Orunbfii^c (principle) an (annc^^mcn, assume) ober legt [le Strbeite." 5. All diminutives in ^m and leilt. 6. Those in nif , with the exception of ginflernf^, darkness, ^enntnig, knowledge, gaulnip, rottenness, 33etrii6nip and S3eliimtnernif, grief, etc. 7. Those in f^um and fot or fel, except tier Steid^t^um, bcr 3rrt'§um, bie EriiBfal, bie Wluf)\al, bcr ©topfel. The gender of compound substantives is always that of the last component ; as, bic 2?orfc^ule, ber .^augtutrt^, bag SEtntcfag. Exceptions are, bie Slnmut^, grace, bie 2lrmut|, poverty, blc £)emut|, humility, bie ©ropmut^, magnanimity, bic actions is expressed by the compound sentence and conjunctions. § 7. The German language distinguishes, not, like the Eng- lish, three, but, like the French and the Greek, four cases ; the Nominative, expressing the subject, the Accusative and Dative, expressing the objects, and the Genitive, expressing attributes and sometimes objects. § 8. Language has moulded certain other forms expressing the relation of notions to the speaker. Notions of beings are referred to the speaker ; — a) By the persons of the verb, the first person being the speaker himself, the. second the person- spoken to, the third the person or thhig spoken of, expressed by the personal pro., nouns I, thou, he (or she or i<), and, when there are several, by we, you, they. b) By demonstrative pronouns and the article; as, Hhe man,' ^this man,' '«mcA a man,' pointing out just the man whom the THEORETICAL PART. 73' speaker speaks of, and ' a man, ' expressing that lie is a man whom the speaker has not before spoken of. § 9. Notions of actions are referred to the speaker by, — a) The Time or Tense, expressing whether an action is going on in the time Present to the- speaker's mind, or in time Past or Future to his mind. h) The Mood, expressing whether the speaker considers the action going on a real one, by the Indicative (as, ' he goes ') ; or a possible, not a real one, by the Subjunctive or Conditional (as, 'if he were going, but he goes not'); or as a necessary one, by the Imperative (as, ' go ! ' ' begone ! '). § 10. All these relations under §§ 8 and 9 may as well be expressed by Adverhs, expressing the Time and Mood, and individualizing by means of the Place the Person or thing or action considered by the speaker. § 11. By the compound sentence the relation of notions of action to each other is expressed. They are referred to each other by means of Go-ordination or of Subordination. Two sentences, each intelligible without the other, when simply placed beside each other, or when connected by one of the Conjunc- tions unt), and, aBer, but, benn, for, fotDot)! — aii auc^, both — as well as, Weber — noc^, are co-ordinate ; as, ' life is short, art is long, bag Scbett ijl turg, bie ^unj! tfl long ; or, ' art is long, but life is short ; or, ' art is long, for life is short ' ; or, ' hfe is aa short, as art is long.' § 12. "When two sentences are so connected that one is dependent on the other, a subordinate compound sentence exists. The one which is either the object, or the attribute, or the subject of the other, is called the Accessory sentence ; the other is called the Principal sentence. § 13. The following is a table of the different parts of speech : — I. Notional Words (Segriff^Worter). 1. Verb (Beitwort). 2. Substantive (.g)aut>ttttort). 7 74 ^ GERMAN GRAMMAR. 3. Adverb (Sejiimmunggwort). 4. Adjective (Sigenfc^aftStBort). n. Relational Words (Sejiel^unggWorter). 5. Article (®ef{^tec^tS»ort). 6. Pronoun (giirwort). 7. Numeral (3a|IWort). 8. Preposition (SSorfe^Wort). 9. Conjunction (S3int)en>Drt). 10. Interjection (see § 284). § 14. Verbs are either Transitive or Intransitive ; transitive, ■when the action goes over from a subject to an object which is acted upon or suffering ; intransitive, when the action rests with the subject, without requiring an object in order to be imderstood and complete. When a verb assumes the form of an adjective, it is called a Participh; when that of a substantive, it is called an Infinitive. § 15. Substantives are either Abstract or Concrete. Abstract ones are such as indicate things not perceptible by the senses, but only by a thinking process, as the names of actions, quali- ties, and conditions ; as, death, goodness, misfortune. Concrete substantives are the names of perceptible things and persons ; as, horse, child, Boston, William. Such may be either Common names, or such as are common to all things or per- sons of the same class ; as, city, tree, flower, bear, etc. ; — or Proper names, or suoh as are confined to only one individual ; as, New York, Ontario, Niagara, Francis, etc. Names of materials, or such as apply to masses without any distinct individuality^ as, milk, sand, wood. Collective substantives^ or such as embrace a multitude of individuals in a Singular ; as, government, assemblage. § 16. Adjectives (and Participles) are either used as attri- hutes or as predicates. Only the former are inflected in German. THEORETICAL PART. 75 Adjectives are employed either in the Positive, or Compara- tive, or Superlative degree; as, great, greater, greatest. § 17. Adverbs are attributes of" verbs^ or predicates, and define and limit their meaning, as adjectives limit and individualize that of substantives, by detailing the time, place, and manner of an action ; as, ' I spell fluently' ; ' Charles is very diligent.' Adverbs are never inflected. § 18. The Article limits or individualizes the meaning of a substantive. The German language has, like the English, a definite article, ber, tie, baS, the, and an indefinite article, ein, etne, etn^ a. § 19. Pronouns are representatives of substantives or nouns in general, used for the sake of brevity. They are either per- sonal, or possessive, or demonstrative, or interrogative, or rela- tivej or indefinite ; as, ' I was happy ' ; ' his courage failed ' ; ' this man says ' ; ' what have you seen ? ' ' he . who lies is wicked ' ; ' no one is to be seen.' Pronouns are, at the same time, either substantive; as, I, thou, he, we, etc., that, this, which, each, etc., when not con- nected with a substantive ; — or adjective ; as, my, your, that, this, which, when connected with a substantive. § 20. Numerals express number or quantity. They are definite numerals ; as, one, two, three, the first, the second, the third; — or indefinite; as, some, many, several. The cardinal numbers, as, one, two, three, fifty, etc., are of a substantive form. The ordinal numbers, as, the first, the second, etc., have the form of adjectives. § 21. Prepositions modify and individualize either the sub- ject, pr the predicate, or the object, by connecting them with a modifying noun ; as, ' the man in the moon is to be seen ' ; ' I speak with him on this matter ' ; ' you like the taste of lemons.' § 22. Conjunctions connect either several subjects, or objects or predicates, of the same sentence, with each other ; as, ' the father and his son are good ' ; ' I read and write German ' ; ' he 76 GERMAN GEAMMAE. speaks English, hut not French * ; — or they connect two or more sentences having certain relations to each other ; as, ' you left the city when I arrived. ' § 23. Interjections express neither notions nor relations, and are not in grammatical connection with the sentence. They are mere exclamations, interrupting the grammatical construc- tion ; as, alas ! hurrah ! oh ! CHAPTER II. OF THE FORMATION OF WORDS. § 24. Words are formed either by derivation or by compo- sition. I. Derivation. § 25. The original germs from which words have sprung are called roots. All of them are monosyllables. The idea ex- pressed by them is a certain kind of motion or action. All roots are therefore verbs ;* but not all verbs are roots, because there is a great number of derivative verbs. Radical verbs, however, are often compounded with prefixes, and the simple root is antiquated; as, tier=Iier-crt, gc=nef=en. Radical and derivative verbs are, in German, inflected after different conjugations. (See Chapter IV.) § 26. Many roots are disused in German, and many other ones preserved only in derivative words; and we must look for the root to ancient dialects, like the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Gothic. In other cases the root is common to all or sev- eral of the dialects, but has assumed in each a, different mean- ing ; lilie [(^er=en, to share, which originally meant to divide (a * This is at least tlie opinion of Becker, Grimm, Bopp, and some other renowned German grammarians ; bat the matter is far from being definitely settled. THEORETICAL PART. 77 share, ploughshare, 5)flugf(|ar), but now in German means only to cut off. § 27. The derivatives are either Primary or Secondary. The Primary derivatives are such as are formed from roots, with or without a change in the radical vowel. The Secondary deriv- atives are those formed by affixes from primary ones. In each further stage of derivation the meaning of the root is more individualized. n. Primary DERrvATrvES. § 28. Substantives and adjectives are formed from roots, either by or without a change of the radical vowel: — 1. Without any affix. , 2. By the addition of one of the terminations n, et, eit, t, e, which, however, do not, like the affixes of secondary derivatives, affect the meaning of the roots ; as, — RADICAL VBKBS. PKIMART DERIVATIVES. o) without any affix. ' ber S3anb, volume, I) with one of the terminations a, el, en, t, t. fiinien, to bind, iag SBanb, ribbon,^ tie, ber SBunti, league, :^e'6ett,to heave, fber ^uB, elevation, lift, X lifting, fliel^ert, to flee, ier glo'^, flea, gra6ett,todig,K^^@^„^ engrave, ) i a > ' bie SSinbe, band. bie Sanbe, band. bcr SBiinbel, bundle. ber Sinber, binder. ber ^t^tx, siphon, eleva- tor. bcr J^eM, lever. [ ber Ijit^el, hillock, bie glud^t, flight. 5 bie ®ruft, tomb. bie ®ru6e, pit. bcr ®ra6cn, ditch. bie S3u(^t, bay, bight. Btcgcit, to bow, (■ ber S3ug,"bow of a J ber Sogen, bow, arch, bend, ( ship, | ber SBiigel, stirrup, hoop. ber Sudel, humpback. The following are some primary substantives and adjectives, whose roots, when not indicated, are lost. 7* 78 GERMAN GRAMMAR. 1. Primary Substantives. 3Der STOatttt, man (from Sanscrit manu, to think) ; t»er ^Ot)f, head (kindred with cup, Latin eapere) ; ber 2lrm, arm ; ter 5u^, foot ; bet gluf , river (from flie^en, to flow) ; bcr SSac^, brook ; ber 33erg, mountain (from Bergen, to hide) ; iier SSaum, tree, beam (from to beam, to emit) ; ber 3Batt), forest, wood (kindred with tt)ilb, wild, Walten, to act, SBelt, world, root to luxuriate) ; ber SBeg, way (from Be^wegen, to move) ; ber ©turm, storm (root stur, Eng. *o sfoV) ; ber SKut^, courage, mood (root Anglo-Sax. muohan, mu1)m, to move) ; ber SEranI, drink (trinlcn) ; ber SSater, father; ber iBruber, brother; ber hunger, hunger; ber J&ammer, hammer ; ber better, cellar ; ber 5EelIcr, the plate ; ber ©c^Iummer, slumber ; ber Singer, finger ; ber 5!JJeifcI, chisel ; ber SSogel, bird ; ber ©piegcl, looking-glass ; ber 2lbel, nobility ; ber Sflflget, nail; ber ^ItQtt, flail; ber ^itgel, hill; ber ©arten, garden; ber SBoben, bottom, ground ; ber Slegen, rain ; ber Saben, shop. S5te ©onne, sun; bie Slonne, tun; bie Slautc, dove; bie 9JJitte, middle, midst ; bie ©etfc, soap. ©03 ^au3, house ; bag Zf^al, dale, valley (from tl)etlen, to deal, divide) ; bag Sanb, land; baS ®elb, money (from gelteit, to be worth) ; bag ^^fanb, pawn ; bag ^t% nest (from nifleit, to nestle) ; bag gelb, field ; boS SKelB, wife (from tsefccn, to weave) ; bag ^aI6, calf; bog T>a6), roof (from bectett, to cover) ; bog ^leib, dress (cloth) ; bag iBtlb, image (from ttlbett, to form, build) ; bag Senfler, window ; bag geuer, fire ; bog Siefcer, fever ; bag ©itter, gate ; bag ^upfer, copper ; bog Seber, leather ; bog Sluber, oar, rudder ; bog SBlefcI, weasel ; bog Ue'bet, evil ; bog ©egcl, sail;, bog SKtttet, means; bflg ^ijfen, cushion; bog ©ifen, iron ; bog SBecEett, basin. The syllable ®c» is prefixed to .many primary derivatives without changing their meaning, and is then called Augment ; as in ber ®eruc^, smell (from riei^en, tp smell, reek) ; ber ©efong, song (from fingen, to sing) ; bie ©ebulb, patience (from bulben, to suffer) ; bog ®ejicC}t, face, sight (from fe^cn, to see). THEORETICAL PART. 79 2. Primary Adjectives. § 29. They are formed either with or without a change of sound {Umlaut), and with or without the addition of one of the terminations or aifixes er, el, en, e, some of them assuming the meaningless augment ge ; as, lueif, white, griin, green, rotl), red, gcIB, yellow, gro^, great (from growan, to grow), fteiti, little, small, fd)inal, small, narrow, tang, long (from lotigen, to reach), iurj, short, alt, old, jung, young, fein, fine, nice, [(^t»er, heavy, difficult (weary), (etd)t, easy, light, ^od), high, Htter, hitter (from fcei^en, to hite), fauer, sour, I;eiter, serene, muger, meagre, lean, munter, brisk ; ebcl, noble, eitel, vain (idle), u6cl, ill (evil) ; cBen, plain (even) ; trage, lazy (from tragen, to bear) ; flrenge, (strong), severe (from jirengen, to string) ; iofife, wise (from Wcifcn, to show) ; leife, low, not loud (from leisan, listen) ; gcfunb, sound ; gewif, certain (from tuijycn, to know) ; gering, small, wee. m. Secondary Derivatives. 1. Derivative Verbs. § 30. Derivative verbs are formed by the addition of suffixes to the substantive or adjective from which they are derived, most of them modifying the vowel ; as, trcinf en, to give to drink (from bc'r %xavX) ; fallen, to fell (from ber gall) ; brangen, to urge (from ier ©rang, throng) ; fc^wac^en, to weaken (from fc^wad), weak) ; fliirfen, to strengthen (from jlarf, strong). The vowel a becomes a; becomes ii, n becomes ii, a\x becomes au, 2. Derivative Substantives and Adjectives. § 31. Secondary derivative substantives are formed from primary derivatives by affixing one of the syllables er, Itng, in, d)en or- leitt, e, :^ett, teit^ fc^aft, ung, ei, nifj, fat or fel, t {) U nt, and by modifying the vowels a, 0, n, au, into a, 6, ii, ftu ; as, ©(^tojfer or ©i^Uiffer, locksmith (from ®d)Iop, lock) ; Stefi^ ling, favorite (from Itch, dear) ; j^onigin, queen (from ^onig, king) ; ©oI)n(^en or ©S^ntein, little son (from ©o|n, son) ; 80 GEEMAN GEAMMAK. aS ©c^af, sheep). Names of persons thus formed from verbs are less common than in English ; as, ©(^neiber, tailor (from fi^neiben) ; Setter, teacher (from Ic^ren) ; 5!J?at)er, mower (from md^ixi). Names of persons are thus derived from the names of countries and THEORETICAL PART. 81 places; as, ber Sngtantier, Englishman (from Sngtanb, Eng- land) ; bcr Srianbcr, Irishman (from 3vlant), Ireland) ; ier ©c^t»ei3er, Swiss- (from ©c^weij, Switzerland) ; ber Slmeritaner, American (from Slmerifa) ; ber 3taUencr, Italian (from 3talien, Italy) ; ber Sloiner, Roman (from SRom, Home) ; ber SBtencr, Viennese (from 2Bien, Vienna). § 34. Names of inhabitants of places are commonly formed in this way, but in many cases there is a diflferent kind of name, terminating in e ; as, ber S5ane, Dane, Deutfc^e, German, gran* 3ofe, Frenchman, ©c^otte, Scotchman, SRujfc, Russian, ©d^tcebe, Swede, ©(^tBa'6e, Swabian, ^ejje, Hessian, Zixxte, Turk, gtanfe, Franconian, SSo^nte, Bohemig,n, ^Jreuf e, Prussian, ©oc^fe, Saxon, gviefe, Frise, and others. The suffix er occurs also in a few names of instruments ; as, SBoI)rer, borer, gimlet, S^VQ^X, hand of a clock, 2BecEer, alarum ; and in the words ^atix, tom-cat, SEauBer, male pigeon, ®anfer, gander. Derivatives in ling (Jing). § 35. These are substantives, names of males, some with a contemptuous or trifling signification ; as, Siingling, youth, grentbltng, stranger,* SJttet^Iing, hireling, 3o0ttng, pupil,* ©iinfl^ ling, favorite, ^auptling, chieftain, 3B'ilIing, twin (from ymt\, two). Those marked thus * are those in which the con- temptuous meaning is in exclusive use. Derivatives in in, § 36. Names of females are formed from those of males, by means of the suffix in, and the Umlaut, where it is possible ; as, J^elbin, heroine {irom .f)elb, hero) ; ®rdpn, countess (from ®raf, count); gitrjlin, princess (from gihfl, prince); ^oc^ln, female cook (from ^0(^, cook) ; .f)unbttt, bitch (from .g)unb, dog) ; greunbin, female friend (from grcunb, friend) ; ?6t»tn, lioness (from 26wc, lion) ; ^elnbin, female enemy (from geinb, enemy). But ®attc, husband, has ®atHn, wife ; SBotc, mes- senger, SSotin ; and thus a few more. The final n is doubled in the plural ; as, ^elbinncn, heroines. 82 GERMAN GKAMMAE. Derivatives in ^en and lettt. (English Mn, et, and kt, in lambkin, mannikin, islet, streamM, hamlet'). § 37. Diminutives are formed from concrete substantives by the suflSxes c^en and lein and the Utidaut ; the suffix c^en being preferred after a final vowel or liquid; the suffix lein after a mute consonant, and especially after a palatial one ; as, ©ij^n^en, ©tii^It^en, little chair, ^ord^en, little hair, ^ijgc^en, little hare, ^(immc^en, little comb, (Sicken, httle egg, and B.xCii!it= lein, SKagbletn, ©uc^Ietn, SodEIetn, little boy, girl, book, buck. This suffix has not always the effect of a mere diminutive upon the substantive to which it is added ; more frequently even it has a caressing signification ; as, SSaterc^en, S!)Zutterd)en, dear father, dear mother; ^fertx^en, a nice horse. SJIabc^cn, girl, has entirely lost the diminutive meaning, the root SRagt), maid, being reserved for maidservant. Sometimes they are used to express ridicule or contempt. Abstract Substantives. C, |clt, and tett, § 38. Abstract substantives denoting a quality are formed from adjectives by the Umlaut and the above sufiixes. Those formed from primary adjectives take e or %nt ; those from secondary derivative adjectives taking !eit. When substan- tives in feit are formed from primary derivative adjectives, the syllable ig is inserted, for the sake of euphony, between the adjective and suffix ; as, gromntigleit (from fromnt, pious). 2)ie ®r6^e, greatness ; bie ^o^e, height ; iiie 35reite, breadth ; bte 3;iefc, depth ; fete Songe, length ; i)ie SDide, thickness ; t)te 2Barme, warmth; We ^atte, cold; ite SiJajfe, wetness; bie ©tSrfe, strength ; bie ©c^wcii^e, weakness ; tie ®itte, goodness ; fete ©efunb^eit, health ; bie ^ranf^ett, sickness ; bie grei|eit, freedom ; bie ©d^on^eit, beauty ; bie SBei^^ett, wisdom ; bie ^iil;n^ett, boldness ; bie Dumm^eit, stupidity ; bie 6(^ttO(^^eit, THEORETICAL PART. 83 weakness ; bie Sflcint;eit, purity ; bic SLrag'^eit, idleness ; ite e« fWonnes an feme 33ergangen^eit. Only a few are derived from roots ; as, SJlelnung, opinion ; .^altung, bearing, carriage ; S!)2enfc^tBert)ung, incarnation ; S>^ti)= ung, drawing ; 2Ber6ung, enlistment. They express either a simple action, as aU the above, or the result of an action, an altered state or condition, sometimes even a concrete meaning ; as, Srftnbung, invention ; grfttl^rung, experience ; aJfift^ung, mixture ; ^(elbung, Clothing ; Srfrifi^ung, refreshment. A few substantives assuming ung become collectives; as, 8 86 GERMAN GKAMMAK. SSBatiuttg, forest ; ©tattung, stabling ; Meibung, clothing ; ^olj* ung, woods. § 45. As another kind of verbal substantive the Infinitive is used, and is allowable with any verb. It takes thef' neuter article, and is declined like a substantive, without having, however, a plural ; as, bag Sefen, reading ; bag ©jjrei^cn, speak- ing ; bag ®el)en, walking. It shuns governing an object. The German cannot construct, like the Enghshman, the reading a booh, iai Sefen ein S5ud^, or etneS guteit iBuc^eg, but prefers to say bag Sefen in eincm guten Sui^e. Some few such infinitives, however, have become real substantives, and are employed as such ; as, bag ©flfen, dinner ; bag Seten, life ; bag Seiben, com- plaint ; bag 3Scr'6re(^ett, SSerge'^cn, crime, misdemeanor ; bag SSergniigen, pleasure; bag SScrlangen, desire; bag @d)rei6en, letter ; bog SBefeJt, being ; bag Stnbenlen, remembrance ; bag S3eWttptfein, consciousness ; etc. ing, tg, rtc^, ii^, tc^t ; «t^, ot|, cnb. § 46. The above sufibces appear only in a very limited num- ber of substantives, the first five only in concrete, the last three in abstract ones. ing in bcr ^^fenntng or 5)fennig, penny ; bcr ©(filling, shilling ; ber ■faring, herring ; bag 9Jlefing, brass. ig in ber ^iinig, king ; ber Sffig, vinegar ; ber Sftettig, radish. ri(^ in a few names of male persons and animals ; as, 2Bit= f^crii^, tyrant ; %'i^v.xx^, ensign ; ®dnferi(^, gander ; Snterid), drake. ic^ and ic^t in a few names of animals and in a few collectives ; as, ber ^rani(|, crane ; ber $at)id)t, hawk; ^el)rt(!^(t), sweepings; ©piitic^t, swill ; 3n'roi(^, twill ; ©i(!id)t, thicket. ut^ in bie Slrmnt^, poverty ; — at| in ber or bie Qmatl^i, or- nament ; bie $eim9t|, home ; — cnb in bie Xugenb, virtue ; bie 3ugenb, youth ; bflg ©lenb, misery (from @U(cnbe, foreign country). THEORETICAL PART. 87 Derivative Adjectives. is (y)- § 47. The suffix ig gives to the primary derivative from which the adjective is formed no modified meaning, but serves only to form adjectives. These when formed from abstract substantives assume, as a rule, tha, Umlaut ; when from concrete ones, they do not, except in jcafferig (from 2Ba([er) ; !6rnig (from ^orn), granulous. fjteipig, diligent; ntac^tig, mighty ; ))rO(^tig, splendid ; giinflig, favorable ; not^ig, necessary ; giitig, kindly ; tuiirbig, worthy (from SBitrbe) ; jornig, angry (from 3Din) ; fonbig, sandy (from ©anb) ; Bluntig, flowery (from S5tume) ; tsolbig, woody (from ISSatb) ; luftig, airy (from £uft) ; faljig, briny ; fccrgtg, moun- tainous ; ^ugetig, hilly ; botnig, thorny. Some take id)t ; as, bornid^t, thorny ; faljic^t, saltish ; Bergi(^t, mountainous. Adjectives are formed from several adverbs of time and place, by adding tg ; as, bortig, of that place (from bort, there) ; liefig, of this place (from :^ier, here) ; je^ig, present (from je^t, now) ; ^eittig, of to-day (from l^cute, to-day) ; Uorig, former (from »or, before) ; fonjitg, other (from fon|l, else) ; iifirig, left (from uljer, over) ; fialbig, speedy (from ialb, soon) ; and from possessive pronouns ; as, tneinig/ mine ; bcinig, thine ; fetnig, his ; unferig, ours ; eurig, yours ; t|rig, theirs, ©aumig, dila- tory, is the only one formed from a verb. The sufHx feltg, occurring in many adjectives, has arisen from the suffix fat or fel (§ 42); as, %xub\ai, 9JIii'^fat — triifi- felig, mitlfelig. Many adjectives are formed analogously where there is no substantive ; as, rcbfctfg, loquacious ; gliidfettg, for- tunate; felnbfeltg, hostile; leutfelig, affable; armfeltg, wretched; |)otbfetig/ most kind ; and some others. if^ {4sh). § 48. The suffix if(^, added to places, countries, nations, parties, creeds, persons, forms a great number of adjectives, without any change of meaning from the original one ; as, 88 GERMAN GKAMMA.B. englifi^, English ; fc^ottifc^, Scotch ; irifi^ or irlotibifc^, Irish ; Welf4 or walif(|, "Welsh ; fpotiifc^, Spanish ; franjofiftl; French ; [d^toebifi^, Swedish; itaUenifc|, Italian; fccrlintf(^, of Berlin; f etnifc^; of Cologne ; riimtfd^, Romish ; fttl^cttifc^, Athenian ; fpartanifc^, Spartan ; j;iit)if(^, Jewish ; griei^ifd), Greek ; Iut^ei:= tf^, Lutheran; ^)rotejtanttf(^, Protestant; fat^olifi^, Catholic; nto^atnebanifc^, Mahometan ^ ^umfiolbtifi^/ of Humboldt; ©o» fratif^, of Socrates ; |)aImer|lonifc^/ Palmerstonian ; :^itnmlifc^, heavenly ; trbiff^/ earthly ; pUifc^, hellish. Formed from names of persons, these adjectives indicate inclination and similarity; as, bieBtfc^, thievish; tnec^tifd^y slavish; friegerifi^, warlike. In most cases this tf(^ implies a blamable, slighting notion; as, weiMfi^; womanish ; !tntitf(|, childish. A few such " are formed from abstract substantives ; as, neibtfc^/ envious ; jantifc^, quarrelsome; — and from verbs; as, miirrif(^, morose. This suffix also forms adjectives from aU kinds of foreign words, like the English -ic, -iced; as, ^'^^ftfi^/ physical ; fritifc^/ critical ; fomif^/ comic(ai) , l^iftorifc^; historical ; ))otittfc^/ po- litic(al) ; I^rif^, lyric(al). $it^f(^ (from .^u'6, elevation), nice, fine, pretty, beutfd^ (old High- German diutisc), German, .and the adjective-substantive fWcnfi^ (old High-German m ennisco), man, are formed in the same way. From long and compound names of cities and places, adjec- tives in cr are preferred to those in tfi^ ; thus, .^eiberberger 5op (Heidelberg vat) is preferable to ^cii)eI6ergtfc^e3 5ap, on account of euphony. § 49. Ii(^ {hj) makes adjectives from abstract substantives without modifying the signification ; as, angflUcJ), anxious ; ))ein= W&i, painful ; El)rli(^, honest ; frieblic^, peaceful ; fc^recflid^, fright- ful; gliicflic^, happy; aBjic^Htc^, intentional ; aBfc^euticI, horrible ; gcfa'^rli^, dangerous; jS^rllc^, yearly; tfigllc^, daily. From concrete substantives it derives adjectives implying THEORETICAL PART. 89 quality ; as, tttatltttii^, manly, like a man ; wetBKc^, feminine ; finblid), childlike ; 'bruberUd), brotherly, fraternal ; fonigtid), kingly, royal ; Batertic^, paternal, fatherly. From adjectives it derives adjectives with a diminutive sense; as, rot£)Ud), reddish; [c^icarjlid), blackish; griintid), greenish; fiipfid), sweetish; fSuerlid), sourish; Heinlic^, mean ; reitilii^, cleanly ; ottlic^, elderly ; reidjlic^, liberal. From verbs it derives adjectives implying feasibility; as, btenlic^, serviceable ; nij|li(^, useful ; jlerfclii^, mortal ; t^unli(|, feasible; tnoglic^, possible; jnerHii^, perceptible; gtauWic^, credible ; loBUc^, laudable ; unfSglic^, unspeakable ; Berne^mlic^, audible ; and Ieferli(^, legible (with the syllable er inserted). The following are never used as adjectives, but only as ad- verbs : — 6e!anntlid), as is well known ; erfltii^, firstly ; folglic^, consequently; freilii^, it is true; gemeinlii^, commonly; inntglii^, heartily; tiirglid), neultc§, lately; fc^tnerli^, hardly; jt(^erltd^, surely ; treulic^, faithfully ; »orne^tnIi(^, chiefly ; l»al)rli(^, verily ; and some others. SJlif Ii(^, critical, dubious, is formed from the inseparable prefix trtip=, en {en). § 50. The suffix en {en) forms adjectives from the names, of materials; as, gotten, golden; filBern, of silver; eifern, of iron; tuotten, wooUen. The letter x is in some of these inserted for euphony's sake ; as, eifern, of iron ; ileicrtt, leaden ; pt3ern, wooden ; fleinern, of stone. lax, fflnt, '^a\t. § 51. !6ar, English abh or ihle, and fant {some), when added to abstract substantives and verbs, produce adjectives expressing possibility or inclination ; as, fic^tbar, visible ; epar, eatable ; trinffiar, drinkable ; I)ortar, audible; banfljar, grateful; frud)t« Bar, fertile; flrieltfam, industrious; fparfam, parsimonious; furc^tfam, timid. A few ia fant are made from other adjectives ; as, einfam, lonesome; genteinfam, common, mutual; genugfflm and fflttfant,, 8* 90 GERMAN GRAMMAR. sufficient. They were originally adverbs, and have, in a later period, become hkewise adjectives, the suffix effecting no change of meaning in the word. § 52. l^oft, when added to abstract substantives and verbs, forms adjectives, denoting a tendency to an action ; as, fd^tua^* l^aft, talkative ; janfloft, quarrelsome ; flanfe^aft, constant ; fiiut)= ^aft, vicious ; tugcnb^aft, virtuous. A few "of these express feasibility ; as, glaub'^aft, credible. A few formed from names of persons express resemblance ; as, tneiflcr^aft, masterly ; fc^iiler^aft, deficient ; rtefen^aft, gigantic ; f(^alf§aft, waggish. A few, formed from adjectives and substantives, correspond with those in tic^, and may be exchanged with them ; as, hoif)a\t, malicious, and tfiglii^ ; front^aft, morbid, sickly, and IronHic^ ; toa|ri)aft, true, veritable, and wa^rtic^ ; fc^mcrjliaft and fc^mevj* Ii(|, painful. rV. CoMPousfD Words. § 53. When two words are so connected as to form only one notion and word, the word obtained is called a compound word; as, ■^auji'^unt) (from ^avLi and ^unb) ; SBeingk^ (from SBein and ®Ia8). The compound word is always written as one word, and the hyphen is not made use of, as in English, except by some writers when a foreign word is compounded with a native one, or when two foreign words are compounded ; as, ©taatg»35otttane ; 2otterie=^ot(ettor. § 54. In every compound word the first component takes the principal accent (for a modification of this rule see page 7), because it determines or individualizes the general meaning of the second component ; while the latter gives to the compound word its gender and declension in a substantive, its character and inflection in a verb. As an exception to this rule, the words 3a'^r'^unbcrt (century) and 3a^rtaufcnb (a thousand years) have the principal accent ' on the second component. SaitgcWcite, ennui, and ©e^eimcrat^, THEORETIC At PART. 91 » privy-councillor, assume sometimes the principal accent on the second component, in which case the first one is also declined. It is evident that in this case they do not. form compounds, but should be written langc 2Bette and gel^eiraer 3tat^. § 55. Each component may itself be again compounded, and then the accent follows the same rule ; as, ®(^u|)'ma' i^er^anti'* tuerf (the principal accent is here on ert, da/s work; Slfd^e^r^mitttuoc^, Ash-Wednesday; .§eilie4»6eere, bilberry; @onne»n»fc^cin, sunshine; STageeg^jeit, time of day. This insertion is frequent with rt and S, these being the termina- tions of the genitive, the former that of feminine nouns in the plural, the latter that of masculine and neuter nouns. Still, in compoimd words, euphony is considered more important than gender, and we find iiebt'S^'Dien^ act of kindness (from SteBe, f ), and 9Jionti=en*fc§etn (from 9Jlonti, m.). The pupil cannot be 92 GERMAN GRAMMAE. furnished with any unexceptional rule for forming compound words, but must look for the correct formation of compounds to the dictionary. The insertion of the euphonic g takes place, as a rule, in compounds whose first component is in itself a com- pound word, or ends in either of the suffixes ^eit, !eit, ung, etc. ; as, ^oc^jeit^tag, wedding-day ; ^antitDertl^cug, workman's tools ; greunbfd^aftSbicnjl, friendly service; SCarnunggtafel, warning- poster; greilcttgfampf, struggle for liberty; Wrmutl^gjeugnig, pauper-certificate ; SReligion^freilett, religious freedom. In S3raut=i=gain, bridegroom (the word gam being out of use) and ^lad^t'i'QaU, nightingale (gaH meaning in old German singer), the euphonic letter ig an i. § 57. The first component is used, as a rule, in the singular number ; the plural occurs with monosyllabic neuters and mas- culines having in the plural er ; as, Slemterjfiger, office-seeker ; ^lnt»evfreunti, friend of children ; ^leiberfc^ranf, clothes-press ; ©ijtterle^re, mythology ; (£ierf(^ate, egg-shell. § 58. When the first component is an adjective, it is joined to the substantive without any euphonic addition ; aa, ®ro^»ater, ©ropmutter; 3Beifei(^e, white oak; ©(^warjfartcr, dyer in black ; ©iietmut^', magnanimity. § 59. When the first component is a verb, its root, as a rule, is joined to the substantive, and only in a few cases a euphonic e is inserted or the whole infinitive is used ; as, 9lcit= ^)fcrb, riding-horse ; SBafc^^aug, wash-house ; SBol^nort, dwelling- place ; S^jiminer, dining-room ; but SBartejtmmcr, waiting-room ; gefetuc^, reading-book; ©abewanne, bathing-tub; Qd6)inlVL6^, drawing-book; SRei^enBret, calculating-board. § 60. When the first component is a preposition or adverb, it is joined to the substantive without any euphonic letter. ,A11 of these are derived from compound verbs, and follow their orthography and grammatical form. Some particles, however, occurring only in compound words, and having the principal accent, are compounded with substantives and adjectives ; they are the- following : — THEORETICAL PART. 93 lttt» (English un-, in-, im-, dis-, mis-) negatives the second component; as, Ungliicf, misfortune ; Unrcc^t, wrong; Unftnn, nonsense; Untraut, weeds. In some few words it expresses monstrosity, or a degenerate condition ; as, Unmenfd), a brute ; Unt^ter, monster ; UngcjlaU, deformity ; Uttt^at, misdeed ; UniBCt= tcr, tempest ; Ungetpm (simple word lost), huge form, monster. UX" (identical with the inseparable prefix er) signifies a pro- ceeding or originating from; as, Urfprung, origin; Ur^c'ber, originator; UrqueH, fountain-head; UvMtii, prototype ; Urfad)C, cause; and some others. In some adjectives it merely intensifies the idea; as, uralt, very old; wvfc^lec^t, very bad; wrplij^li^, very sudden. ant= (as a verbal prefix eitt) meaning forth or towards, is to be found in 9lnttt)ort, answer, and 2lntli^, face. abtX'f meaning originally the same as after, and after* (after), what is below the mark, false, spurious, form : Slfcerglaufee, superstition; Stberwi^, craziness; 91 fterrebe, slander; 3lfterpac^t, under-tenure ; Slfterfiinig, pretender to the throne; ^ftcrge6urt, monstrous birth. The adverb ahtvmaU, once more, conveys the same idea. erj', arch, is a superlative of substantives; as, Srjcttgcl, arch- angel ; Srgfetnt), archfiend ; SrjBofewic^t, arrant villain ; ®r3t)ieb, arrant thief; (£r36tfc^of, archbishop ; Srjtjerjog, archduke, etc jntp», mis-, enters into compounds with verbs. But a few compound substantives are formed directly from substantives, with this prefix ; namely, SKif griff, mistake ; SJliptattg, 5!Wif ton, Wli^laut, dissonance; SJMjfet^^at, misdeed; fWi^gunfi:, iE-will; fOZtpaergniigen, displeasure; ISli^tvtiit, discredit; 9)li^gef{^i(I, adverse fate; 9J?tpgejtott, deformity; Tti^ljnxatt), misalliance; SSJligmut^, ill-humor; SSHiptritt, misstep; SOJt^Waii}^, scarcity; and the adjective tttift}eUlg, discordant. 2.- Compound Adjectives. C- § 61. Adjectives are compounded, — 1. With other adjectives ; as, iumtnirei^, impudent ; griingelB, greenish-yellow. 9-t GERMAN GKAMMAE. Here must be mentioned those adjectives compoundea with, — 1. ret^ and BotI ; as, trojiretc^ (rich in solace), consoling ; freu- bcnttoH, jojrful ; — and their contraries, leer and loS ; as, freu=' tienleer, joyless; troftloS, inconsolable, comfortless; — of which there is a large number. 2. maf ig and re(^t, denoting accorrf- ing or agreeably to ; as, gefc^mfipig, according to law, lawful ; ^elbenma^ig, heroic ; fenhec^t, perpendicular; tt>inlelre(|t, rec- tangular ; f^utgere^t (with the meaningless prefix ge= inserted), strict, according to the school. ■ 3. ^alttg (found only in com- position), containing; as, golbl^alttg. 4. fertig, ready to; as, reifefertig, ready for travel ; fegelfcrttg, re'ady to sail. 5. i»ert^ and ipiirbig, worthy (compounded always with genitives) ; as, Iieljengtt)uri)tg, l§a|fengiDert|, amiable, hateful. 2. With substantives ; as, Ientenla|m, lame in the loins ; or6citf(^eu, slothful. After the suffixes ^nt, Icit, ung, etc., a euphonic S is inserted ; as, l^offnunggftott, hopeful. 3. "With verbs, from the root; as, [d^etntjcilig, hypocritical; incr!)»iirt)tg, noteworthy ; gtauBtoiirbig, credible. 4. With prepositions, prefixes, and adverbs ; as, iitermutl^ig, haughty; BorBebac^t, considerate; initfc^ultiig, accessory to a crime; unrest, wrong; uralt, very old; erjbumtn, extremely stupid. The euphonic rules are the same as with substantives. Adjectives derived from compound substantives an4 verbs are not, properly speaking, compound adjectives ; as, Sorjiigltd^, preferable ; anwenbiar, applicable. The compound adjectives Uor'ne^irt, gentle, of rank, and gc'nel^nt, agreeable, are directly formed from the verb ncl)inett and ijor* or ge«. § 62. The prefix un is, as a rule, not accented ; as, unflcrB''^ lid), immortal ; unfag'Ii(^, unutterable, ineffable ; uitenJj'Iic^, infinite ; unglautTli^, incredible. But when the negation is to be emphatically made, the same words may assume a principal accent on the syllable un, and a secondary on the stem. The same holds good of adjectives which express the positive con- trary of their simple adjective; as, un'gefunl), iU; un'gejogcn, ill-bred ; uti'Bevfc^amt, impudent ; un'natiirtidl, unnatural ; un'* THEORETICAL PART. 95. fd)utbtg, innocent; un'glucfric^, unhappy; un'gleid), unequal; wn'ad)t, not genuine. Such adjectives, o( course, never have the accent on the stem. There are a few adjectives compounded with un«, of which the simple adjective is not extant; as, unauf(}ortic^, incessant, ungefliim, boisterous, vehement (the adjectives aufC^iirUc^ and gejlitm do not exist). 3. Compound Adverbs and Prepositions. § 63. 1. Adverbs of place and direction are compounded with prepositions or with other adverbs of place, as !^er (meaning hither, into the presence of the person speaking) and ^in {thither, away from the person speaking), the accent usually lying on the second component, and in only a few exceptions on the first ; as, l^erBot', forth ; l)erii'ber, over here ; ^erun'ter, down here, hither; l^eretn', in here; |erau3', out here, hither; !^irt= VL'btx, over there, thither ; '^imtn'ter, over there, thither ; l^inein', in there ; I)tente'bett, down here on earth ; flufWartS, upward ; aB'Sodrtg, downward ; l^ttt'tuavtg, thitherward ; ^er'lt»arti3, hither- ward; riiii'wSrtg, backward; Uor'wfirt^, forward; ^eim'ttiartS, homeward ; ^erju', ^inju', near, hither, thither ; |ernad)', after- wards ; ^erfcei', near ; '^erfluf, etc. 2. A preposition is compounded with another one, forming an adverb ; as, ttoran', on, before ; Sol'Bei'/ by, past ; Borau*', foremost; Sorii'Bcr, by, past; mitun'ter, sometimes; burc^aug', throughout, by aU means ; iiberau^', exceedingly, etc. 3. A preposition is compounded with a pronoun, forming an adverb or conjunction ; as, inbem', while ; nai^bent', after ; fett» titm', since ; 3ubem', moreover ; iifierbieg', besides ; unterfccjf ett/ meanwhile ; barin', in this, in that ; baran'; on this, on that ; bavauf, baran, baju', thereupon, thereat, thereto ; tuortn', in which, in what, wherein ; tDorauf/ WOBon', tti03u', iPOIta^', whereupon, whereof, whereto, whereafter. 4. A preposition is combined with an indefinite pronoun, forming an adverb ; as, uhtxoX, everywhere ; juerjl',, first ; 3unid;te, at naught. 96 GKKMAN GRAMMAR. 5. Adverbs and conjunctions are combined to form adverbs and conjunctions ; as, algbann', then, afterwards ; aV\o, there- fore; ben'noc^, nevertheless ; fowot}!', as well ; obtwot;!', although; etc. 4. Compound Verbs. § 64. Verbs are compounded, either, — 1. With nouns; as, friegfii:^rett, to wage war; banffagen, |aug|alten, to keep house ; jlattftnben, to take place ; (which may as well be written as two words, thus, .Krieg fit(;ren, ©tott finbeti;) garo^fprec^en, to boast; wol^ItBotten, to wish well; ^od)- ad)ten, to esteem highly ; gutfagen, to guarantee; freilaffen, to set free ; feftt)aUcn, to hold fast; etc. Verbs derived from com- pound substantives, however, and therefore not being, properly speaking, compound verbs, must be distinguished from the above ; as, 'i^an^obtn, to manage (from $anbI)aBc, handle) ; friit)jiiicfctt/ to brealcfast (from g'^u^jluil/ ii->" breakfast) ; tuett* eifertt; to vie with (from SBetteifer, emulation). 2. With adverbs and prepositions (the latter assuming the nature of adverbs) ; as, anjtet)en/ to put on ; Dov^erfagen, to prophesy ; oufjlcI)en, to stand up ; nac^fotgcn, to follow after. In these two cases the principal accent is always on the first component ; as, banf'fagsit, i5or|er'fagett, and the compound is then always separated in simple tenses of the verb. 3. With inseparable prepositions, or such as do not exist except in such compounds, and cannot assume the accent (ex- cept a few compounded with ant* and inig=). The following belong here : 5e in Betta'gen, to bewail ; ent in cntftei'ben, to undress; ftnt in aitt'wortett, to answer; er in crtBa'(i)en; to awake ; ijer in »erge'6en, to forgive ; jer in jerftij'ven, to destroy ; jtiif in tni^fal'Ien, to displease ; uott in tjotlBvin'gen, to fulfil ; wiber in tuiberjle'^cn, to withstand; :^inter in l^interge'^en, to cheat. The augment ge does not modify the signification of the simple verb ; as, kauc^en and gc'6rflttc^en/ to use ; nii^ett and THEORETICAL PART. 97 gentc^ctt/ to enjoy. Except only gejle'^eit; to confess. But it is inseparable, and has no accent. § 65. The prefix 6e makes transitive verbs of neuter ones ; as, Betaken, to laugh at; !6eft^en, to possess; begct)en, to com- mit-; tietoeincn, to bewail ; iereadjen, to guard ; Ijelommen, to get, come by ; 'befyvi6)en, to discuss ; fceret>en, to persuade ; ieliigen, to deceive by lies. The verb ief(^ft)id)tigcn/ to appease (from fdjweigen), changes the stem. Sometimes it gives a transitive verb a direction towards another object ; as, fcefaeit, hehaum, l&epflanjen (to sow, culti- vate, plant) cin 5etb, whereas the object of faen would be seed, of lautn, a house, etc. ; tetnaten, to paint on (a board), from matcit, to paint (a picture) ; terfluljen, to rob (a person), from rauten, to plunder (money) ; !&erat{)ett, to counsel (a person), from ratten, to advise (a thing). Sometimes it intensifies only the signification of a transitive verb ; as, Benclmcn and nct)men ; fcetreifcett and treifcen ; Befd)af= fen and f(^affcn ; tejiDittgen and jtBingcn ; 'betruBen and triikn \to afflict, from to darken) ; ie^Uen, to keep, ^Iten, to hold. Sometimes it forms transitive verbs (causative) from sub- stantives and adjectives ; as, 'bemii^cn, to trouble ; beneiben, to envy ; icfreunbctt, to make friends ; befrcien, to free ; Betaufien, , t» deafen; from Mu^t, Sitett), S'^eunb, fret, tau6. Sometimes an euphonic ig or r is inserted before the termination ; as, 6e= gnabigen, to pardon ; befanftigen, to appease ; fcegeiflerii/ to in- spire ; from ®nabe, fanft, ®ei^. It occurs very seldom in neuter verbs with intransitive meaning ; as, bc^arren, to persevere ; Betu^^cn, to rest upon ; ietjagen, to please; befle'^en, to consist, subsist. § 66. The prefix ent expresses privation or separation, and is either compounded with a verb already in use ; as, entMnben, to absolve ; entfltet)en, to escape ; entnc:^mcn, to take out ; ent* wenben, to steal; entaieljcn, to withdraw; cntfpringcn or mt" lommen, to escape ; — or it is compounded with substantives and 9 98 GERMAN GRAMMAR. adjectives into verbs ; as, ent^aupten, to behead ; etttfiaftctt, to weaken ; entcrficn, to disinherit ; entooltern, to depopulate ; ent= fernen, to remove ; entfc^ulbigen, to excuse ; entl»ertt)cjt, to de- preciate. In entfpred^en, to correspond, entBietett/ to bid, ent= l^attett, to comprise, ent seems to have the same meaning as the preposition an. cmp occurs only in three verbs : emt5fet)tcn/ to recommend ; enHJfangen, to receive ; cmpfinbeit, to feel. § 67. The prefix tx, originally the same as aui, out, signifies a proceeding out of, and in transitive verbs the attaining to, succeeding in an object; as, erfd^6))fert, to exhaust; ei"3tcl;ert/ to 'educate ; evrettett/ to save from ; erfc^aprt/ to create ; cr= regeti/ to excite ; crwae^en/ to be awakened ; erwerten, to earn; crlangen, erretd^en, to attain to; crfparen, to save; er* Iflufen, to purchase ; erftttbett, to invent ; crjtoingen, to enforce ; etrwac^feit/ to grow up ; cvfreucn, to make glad ; crbaucn, to buUd up ; cvwccfett; to awaken ; ertettcirt, to obtain by begging ; erlerncn, to learn completely ; erfcnnen, to recognize ; txllidtn, to get sight of. It forms verbs from adjectives denoting a transition into another state ; as, errot^en, crfalten, crflarfcn, crtueii^cn, erblin* i)Ctt/ erla'^ntert/ to become red, cold, strong, soft, blind, lame; and cr^citern, crweitern, ermuptcrn; crflaren (to explain), er* frifc^eit (to refresh), to make glad, wider, brisk, clear, fresh, etc. § 68. The prefix »er has sprung from ijor or fort, before, forth, and expresses a direction away from a subject or object, consequently a losing, spoiling, annihilating process ; as, »ct= gel^eii/ to pass away; »erfenbctt, to send forth; ijertDerfen, to throw away, reject; Berfaufctt/ to sell; Derbietett/ to forbid; Scrlajfen, to forsake ; serlieren, to lose ; »erfc^njini)cn, to dis- appear ; locrntc^ten/ to annihilate ; ijcrfirennen, to bum ; i)cr= trinfcn, to spend in drinking ; Bevf)>ieten, to lose by playing ; S)er!enncn, to mistake ; serjieljen, to spoil (a child) ; uertat^ctt/ to betray ; Sjerfc^erjen, to lose by sporting. lii verbs formed with tjcr from substantives and from adjec- THEOKETICAL PART. 99 tives, particularly in the comparative form, it expresses only- transformation ; as, uerjletnerit, to petrify ; sergolteit/ to gild ; l^er!riip)>eIn, to cripple ; ueviroiiflcrt, to lay waste ; Derjiingcn, to rejuvenate, make young ; uevgropern, to enlarge ; ttcrarmen, to become poor ; SErlangertt/ to make longer, etc. Annotation. — The prefixes er and Uer are opposed to each other in meaning; as, Sr lann titc^t ertangctt, toai er ucrlangt, He cannot obtain what he demands; Tlan f)at met)r Derrec^net, aU erre(^net {Prov.), They have lost rather than gained by calculating. But this opposition not being one of the original forms of the language, but a later adoption, there is sometimes a vacillating between cr and Ucr ; as, erllifc^en and ijerliifdjen, to be extinguished; erfilaffen and tterHajfen, to grow pale, etc. ' § 69. jer denotes a dissolution or going to pieces ; as, gergct^eit; to go to pieces ; jerfattett/ to crumble to pieces ;. jerlire^en, to break asunder ; jevfpringett; to burst ; jerfliepett; to melt away ; 3erji6ren, to destroy ; 3errei^en, to tear to pieces. § 70. tltip expresses the contrary of the simple verb, like the English mis- ; as,_ tnipfaHen/ to displease ; mipgliiden or ntip« lingen, to fail; mi^Qonntrij to grudge; mifleitcn, to mislead; ' ntiptrauc^en/ to abuse. The accent vacillates between the prefix and the root, while in substantives derived from these verbs it occurs only oii the prefix; as, SKip'brauc^, 9Ki§'gunfl, fWtg'fattcn. (See § 60.) § 71. The prefix »oH (fvM-) occurs only in sotf6viMgett, to accompUsh; DoUenben, to finish; i)ottfit|ren and soKjicl^en, to ^execute. In all other verbs it is a separable preposition, and accented ; as in tooU'mac^en, Boll'futten, Dott'giegeit, to fill up. The prefix «rt does not make compound verbs, as in the English to unlearn, undress. § 72. The prefix wiber, against, occurs in tt)iterfa|'rett, to happen ; wifcerrat^en, to dissuade ; toiberregert, to refute ; t»it)cr» rufen, to retract ; tPtberflel^cn, to resist ; totbcrfe^en ftc^, to oppose. Some nouns derived from these verbs have the accent on 100 GERMAN GRAMMAS. the prefix ; as, SCi'berflanb, resistance ; 2Bt'i)crruf, revocation ; and analogously SSi'berfai^er, SBi'berpart; antagonist ; tBtberlii^, disgusting. The following only have the accent on the root : ffiStberte'gung, refutation; toiberfe^'Ud); refractory; tpiberruftid^, revocable ; untt>it)crjle^'It(^, irresistible. In wieber^o'Ien, to repeat, the adverb i»ieber/ again, has also become a prefix. § 73. The prefix Ittttet; hehind, occurs only in l^tntcrBIei'Sen/ to remain or to remain undone ; l^irtterlaf'fen, to leave behind"; ^interle'gen, to lay up ; \vaXtxa,t'%tv., to deceive ; l^intertrei'Bert, to hinder; l^intcrBrin'gctt, to bring to notice. But all nouns not derived from these verbs have the prefix accented; as, .^in'tcvlifl, cunning ; .&in'tergrunt)> background ; ^in'tcrfu^, hind- foot ; .{(itt'ter^alt, ambush ; .^tn'terji^, back seat. § 74. The preposition burcl, through, as a prefix, means thoroughly: burc^brin'gctt, to pierce ; burc^ftt'd^en, burd^for'fc^cn,! to search thoroughly ; t)ur(|tr'ren; to wander through ; burd^fco^'* ten, to pierce ; bur(^^e'|en, to go through ; buri^fclid'en, burc§= fe'|»en, burc^fc^au'eit/ to see, look through ; burc^we'ljen, to ■ interweave. All of these verbs, and some more, may just as well be separable, and have the accent on the preposition. In this case the stress is upon the preposition ;' in the other case it is on the verb itself, and the meaning is figurative or abstract. Substantives derived from verbs compounded with burc^ have (with the exception of ©urd^fu'c^uitg, examination, search, £)urd|trte'6cn^ctt, artfulness, smartness, and all those in ung _ formed from the above verbs) the accent on the preposition ; as, £)ttrc|'ftc^t, ©urc^'gang, passage through ; ©urc^'fc^ftu. For the adverbs, see §§ 263-267. § 75. The preposition uvx, around, as a prefix, denotes a surrounding, as in the foUowing verbs : umar'ntcn, to em- brace ; umfan'gen, ttrnfaf fen, to comprise, to contain ; wmge'« ten, to surround ; umge'^en, to avoid ; umgren'jcn, to bound round about ; umgiir'ten, to gird ; um^at'fcn, to embrace ; THEOEETICAL PART. 101 itmm'tejt, to envelop ; untftattt'inern, untHaf'tcrtt, to clasp ; untHei'ben; to clothe with; utnla'gern, to besiege, encompass; utnlau'fen, to run around ; umpflan'jen, to plant around ; urn* reifeit/ to travel around ; umfl^an'jett/ to circumvallate ; um= ft^at'ten, to surround with shade ; umfc^if fen, umfe'getn, to circumnavigate ; umfd^Iei'ern, to cover with a veil ; umfc^Iieg'crt and utnfc^Iin'gen, to enclose, embrace ; umfc^rei'bcn, to express a thing by circumlocution or paraphrase ; umjf dn'nen, to span, fathom ; otntflel'ten, to surround, beset ; umflreu'ctt, to strew around; umftrtct'en, to surround with snares ; umwe'^en, to blow around; umwict'etn, umtoin'tictt, to wind around; umw often, to overcast with clouds ; umsau'ncn, to enclose with a hedge ; urn* jic'^en, umjin'gein, to surround. Most of these verbs, and about as many others, have another meaning when the accent and stress lie on the preposition; as, um'gel^ctt, um'kufen, unt'reiten, to go a round-about way; wnt'giirtcn, to gird' one's self with ; wnt'IIeibcn, itnt'jte^en, to change clothes ; ■um'ttie'^en, to blow down ; u-m'arBeiten, to do afresh; unt'fctflfen, to blow down; wnt'Jrec^en, to break down or up ; and many more. ■ Derivative substantives adopt the accent of their verbs, when terminating in ung ; in all other cases the preposition has the accent. For the adverbs, see §§ 263-267. § 76. The preposition u6er, as a prefix, implies, — a) Covering a surface or extending over a space ; as, iiBer* !6au'en, to build over ; itfier'^au'fen, to overburden ; u6erf^ft)^'» nten, to overflow; uBerma'Ien, to paint over; iiBerjlei'gcn, to surpass; ittertliiJ'en, to look over; itterfe'^ett, to overlook; iifccrnai^'ten, to pass the night. J) Surpassing or overdoing ; as, uBerBie'ten, to overbid, out- bid ; iiBerflii'geltt, to outflank ; uBerle'ficn, to outlive ; uBertif'= ten, to outwit ; uBerman'nen, uSerwin'ben, uBertBal'ttgcn, to overpower, overcome ; itfcertref fen, to surpass ; iifierflim'ntcn, to outvote ; uBerla'ben, to overcharge ; ufiertrei'Ben, to exaggerate ; ul6er(ir'6eitcn, to fatigue ; ftd^ ii^ereffen, to eat too much ; iiier* 102 GERMAN GEAMMAK. ■fiillen, to overfill; nbndim, to spoil by hurry; ufeerfiit'tertt, to overfeed. c) Giving and receiving; as, iikrtictti'gtn, to bring; wBer^' lic'fern, to deliver; Mtxneii'mm, to accept; ixltx^an'UQtn, to iand over; uterge'Bcn, to surrender, .to tender; ubcrlcjn'mett, ■to come by. ' denotes, — a) o^ or _/rojra, implying separation; as, (j'Breifen, to depart ; alnt^mm, to take off; — b) a gradual decrease ; as, abntf^mm, to decrease ; dbrm^ixi, to wear by use; — c) conclusion and purpose (end) ; as, abxtd^ntn, to balance accounts; aSfel^crt/ to design; — d) negation; as, aBfc^Ctffett, to abolish; d'bfc^ttioren, to abjure; aBraf^en, to dissuade. 2. 9Itt* denotes, — «) approach or direction to the surface 'of a thing; as, anfet)eK, to look at; anfprei^ert, to speak to; ftnfiil)lett, to touch ; — 6) fastening to ; as, an'6inbcn, to tie on, to fasten to; ftc^ anftebein, to settle; — c) beginning; as, attfangctt; to commence ; fttiBrennen, to kindle. 3. 3luf» denotes, — a) a rest on, or direction upon, the uppe^ 104 GEEMAN GEAMMAE. surface of a thing ; as, auflegen, to impose ; aufliegett/ to lie on ; — h) an upright state, or direction upwards ; as, aufjlct)en, to rise ; auffieigen, to ascend ; — c) a display ; as, aufbecfcn, to un- cover ; ouffu(^en, to search for; — d) opening ; as, Ouff(^liepeJt, to unlock ; auf6re(^en; to break open ; — e) completing or itsing up; as, ttufejycn, to eat up; aufge'ben, to give up; ftuf(;6ren, to cease. 4. Slugs denotes, — a) proceeding from out of the midst of a thing; as, auStretben, to drive out; ttug»al;len, to select; — 5) exemption; as, ougfc^Iiepen, to exclude; — c) extent; as, auS* flrcdeit, to extend; augfireiten, to spread; — d) thoroughly doing a work ; as, audfiiUen, to fill up ; augflopfen, to stuff, to cram ; ouglai^en, to laugh at; flu^Bejyetn, to mend; ttuslefen, to read to the end ; au^fi^Iafen; to sleep enough ; — e) ending ; as, au3* Io[(^en, to extinguish ; ougtrin!cn, to empty the glass. 5. Set* denotes society and attribution ; as, ficifiigctl/ to add ; tciflimmen/ to assent ; Bctlegctt; to attribute, to impute. 6. (£in= denotes, — a) direction into the interior ; as, ein* gicpctt/ to pour in ; einf(^Iiepen, to include, enclose ; einat^mctt/ to inhale ; — '■ h) contraction ; as, cinfdivumpfen, to shrink ; ein= troiJnen, to dry up ; einfattcn, to fall in (down, of walls) ; — c) transition into another state ; as, einWei^Ctt, to inaugurate ; einweic^en, to soak ; etnf(^metjen, to melt down ; cinwentien, to object. 7. $!)'Ztt» denotes participation; as, mitflJielcn/ to join in the game ; tnittl^eilen, to communicate. . 8. Stacks denotes after in all its significations; — a) follow- ing ; as in nac^folgejt, to follow; na^tf^un, to imitate; — b) inquiry, search; as, nac^fragett, to inquire after; nac^bcnfcn, to reflect; — c) yielding; as, nac^getett, to yield; nac^lojfen, to leave off, to diminish. 9. C)6= denotes over, dominion ; as, o^jtegett/ to conquer ; o6= taoXttn, to prevail. 10. SSor» denotes, — a) ie/bre, both in space and time; as, ttorlcgett/ to lay before ; »ortet>euten/ to forebode ; »orar6eiten, to THEORETICAL PART. 105 prepare a work; — J) caution and screening ; as, toovfe^en {\ii))i to be cautious; Dorljeugetl, to obviate, prevent; — c) giving an eifgimple for imitation; as, Uorfpielen, imxma^^m ; r— d) forward- ness, eminence ; as, ijorragett/ to project ; sorSjringen, to press forward. 11. 3«= denotes, — a) towards; as, juful^ren, to lead to; ju* cilen/ to hasten towards ; — h) fitting, adjusting ; as, juieretten, to prepare ; jutrcffen, to agree ; — c) addition ; as, jurci^nen, to add in calculation ; jufi^reifcen, to ascribe ; — d) continuation;' as, julefctt/ to read on; ju^orcn, to listen to; — e) closing ; as, 3uf(^Uegen, to shut up. V. Anomalous Composition. § 80. There are compound substantives, anomalously com- posed, the first component appearing in the second place, and the second one in the first ; as in STflugeni^t^ (a good-for- nothing fellow), ©torefrleti (disturber of the peace), ®aufau3 (m., a drunkard), 3lci§auS (m., flight) ; — or attributive parti- ciples being melted with a substantive into one notion ; as, ©lii^wurm (glii^cnbcr SBurm, glowing worm), ©pottoogel (fpot* tenter SSogcI, mocking-bird), ©ingsogcl (jtngenber SSogcI, sing- ing-bird) ; — or a person being nicknamed from a member of his body; as, ©tumpfnafe, f., flat-nose (a person with a flat nose) ; SBIauBart, m., blue-beard ; 3flot|rocE, a red coat ; S3Iau= jlrutnpf, m., blue-stocking ; 9{uttt»lo)}f, m., round-head ; etrt SEro^^ iopf/ a headstrong person; ettt 'Si&jXtx^ald, a crying-baby; — or a whole sentence being employed as a substantive ; as, etrt 23ergtf meinnti^t, a forget-me-not'; bcr SBiEtowin, the welcome ; ber ®0ttfei6eiuni3 (the God be with us !), the Devil ; Seterec^t, Live right ; giirdjtegott/ Fear God ; and similar proper nouns. 106 GERMAN GKAMMAE. CHAPTER m. - OF VEEBS. • § 81. Verbs are either auxiliary verbs or verhs 'proper. The former convey no notion, but only relations between subject and predicate and the speaker ; as, ' he is going,' ' he lias sung,' ' he will sleep,' ' Cesar was murdered.' The latter convey ideas or "notions, and constitute the predicate. § 82. .Verbs proper are either transitive or intransitive (§ 14), the former always requiring a direct object, expressed by an accusative, to be complete and understood ; the latter are either neuter verbs, or such as express an action which requires no object at all to be complete and intelligible ; or they are intran- sitives proper, requiring an object in the dative or genitive to be understood. Thus to heat, fc^Iagetl; is a transitive verb, because it requires an accusative; to seem (it seems to me), fdjeineti/ is an intransitive verb, because it requires a dative ; and to sleep, fc^tofett/ is a neuter verb, because it requires no object at all to convey an idea or notion. § 83. Transitive verbs, which comprise the great bulk of verbs of every language, are employed either in the Active or in the Passive Voice ; — the former expressing that the subject is acting or working upon an object; as, 'the father praises the child ' ; — the latter expressing that the subject is acted upon or suffering something, or is, properly speaking, an object; as, 'the child is praised by his father.' Such verbs as express that subject and object are the same person or thing, are called Ee- jlexive verbs ; as, 'I prepare myself.' Annotation. — The English language has no reflexive verbs, properly spealiing, but only a reflexive use of transitive verbs. But the German is rich in reflexive verbs proper, which are not in use as ti-ansitives ; as, ic^ freue mi(|/ ^ I rejoice,' while it is impossible to say i^ freue t)i(^. § 84. AU verbs are inflected by Person, Number, Tense, and THEORETICAL PAET. 107 Mood. There are three persons in the singular, and three in the plural, of each tense of each mood, except that the Imper- sonal verbs have only one person in the singular (it rains, it lightens, it rained, etc.) of each tense of each mood. § 85. All verbs (without exception in German) have six tenses to express the time of the action ; — three absolute tenses', viz. : a. Present, \&i ftngc ; J. Perfect, t(^ ^alje gefungen ; c. Future, td^ merbe (Ingen; — and three relative tenses, viz.: a. Imperfect, t(^ fang ; h. Pluperfect, ic^ ^atte gefungcn ; c. Future Perfect, td^ juerbe gcfungen laBeit, Only the Present and the Imper- fect have an inflection simple or proper ; the other tenses of the active, and all tenses of the passive voice, are formed by means of auxiliary verbs, and are called compound tenses. § 86. All verbs have four moods to express the different re- lations of the action of the sentence to the speaker, viz. : the Indicative mood, which really asserts the opinion of the speaker, as, ev xjt iJtein SSater ; the Subjunctive mood, which quotes the assertion of another person than the speaker, as, SJlan fagt, cr fel nid)t tncin 5Sater ; the Conditional, used in conditional senten- ces, as, Sr witrbe sieKeii^t tnein 33ater fetn, He might, perhaps, be my father ; and the Imperative mood, used in expressing commands or entreaties, as, Plural like the Plural Indicative. Imperfect Tense. Sing. 1. i(| tiime f^tvoox Like the Indicative Imperfect. 2. bttJamejl ^erijor 3. er fame l^ersor, Plttk. 1. wir tamen '^ersor 2. i|r Mmet ^ersjor 3. f!e latnett l^ersor. Impeeative Mood. Come forth ! Lay out I Sing. 2. fomm(c) l^erDor, Jc9(0 <«<^ ! Pluk. 2. tomm(e)t ^er»or. legt auil Participles. Pres. l^erDorlontmenti, coming forth, ftuglegcnb, laying out, Past. |er»orgefommen, come forth. ausgelegt, layed out. Exercises for Inflection. •> au0trin!en, to drink up, aufflcUett, to put up, nac^fpringen, to spring after, Dorfc^cn, to set before. ttJO^Iflingen, to sound well, THEORETICAL J'ART. 115 § 95. SIMPLE FOEMS OF tHE AUXILIARY VERBS. Infin. fein, to be. f^abtn, to have. tterbett, to become. Indicative Mood. Present Tense. lam. I have. I become. Sing. 1. i(^ iirt ic^ f^alt \^ mx))t 2. t»u Bift buiafl btt Wirfl 3. er ifl (lie, es ijl), er |at, er Wirt), Plub, . 1. juir ftnb ttir '^altn jrir werbett 2. i:^r feib i^r ^Bt •i:^r wertet 3. flc flnt). fie :^al6en. fie wertcrt. Imperfect Tense. I was. I had. I beftime. Sing. 1. ic§ war i6) latte i(^ iBurbe* 2. iiu warp: iu l^attejl i)u wurbep 3. er tear, er |atte, er wurbe, Plue. , 1. iulr warett wir l^attctt t»ir tcurben 2. i^r wart (toarct) i^r lattet V^x tturbet 3. fie tuaren. fie :^attett. fie tuuriett. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. I be. I have. I become. Sing. 1. ic^ fei ic^ ^alt i(| werie 2. t)U fci^ i)tt :§aBefl bu iuerbcfl 3. er fel, er ^a'6e, er werbe, Pluk. 1. t»tr feien ttir l^aieit tuir toerbett 2. i^r feiet t^r -ijUltt t:^r iuerbet 3. fie feien. fte ^a'6ett. fte tuerben. * Instead of this form of the singular, there are in use i($ itKttb, tit Xowi^, ec ivact (ancient form), more in poetry than In prose. IM 6EKMAN GRAMMAE. •I were. Sing, 1. i^ wore 2. t)tt t»a«jl 3. er t»drc, Pldr. 1. tBtr toaxtn 2. i^r waret 3. fte wSren, Sing. 2. fci, be, Pluk. 2. feit), be. Pz-es. fctctti), being, Past. gciBefctt, been. Imperfect Tense. I bad. t(^ ptte itt :^attefl er ^atte, ttir gotten t|r pttet |le :^otten, Impekatitb Mood, |flBe, have, |al&t, have. Pakticiples. '^abm'o, having, ^tijalt, had. Instead of geworben, in all compound jBoricn is used. I should become, ic^ wiirtie t)tt wiirbcjl er witrbe, jDir wiirbert i^r tuiiriet (Je wuriett. tterbc, become, luerbet, become. Werbenb, becoming, getuorben, become, forms of the Passive § 96. COMPOinro FORMS 01" CONJUGATION. The Perfect and Pluperfect tenses are formed by the Parti- ciple Past of the verb and the Present and Imperfect tenses of one of the auxiliary verbs l^a'&cn or fein, exactly as in English. Which of these two auxiliary verbs is to be used will be seen from § 110, the use being to some extent different in both languages. The Future tense is formed by the Infinitive Present of the principal verb and the present tense of wcrben. Perfect Tense, Ihfinitive. gefungen ^tcn, to have sung, gefjjrungen feitt, to have sprung. gercbet ^abcn, to have spoken, ge'^a'fct ^afien, to have had. ouSgelegt ^atett, to have laid out. gewanbert fein, to have wandered, getuefcn fein, to have been. !§er»orge!otmnert fein, to have come forth. THBOKETICAL PAKT. 117 Indicative. ic^ |a6e (cr l§at) gefungen, I have (he has) sung, ic^ Un (er ift) gefprungcn, I have (he has) sprung. i4 ^alJe (er I;ot) gerebet, I have (he has) spoken. i(^ Un (er tfl) gewanbert, I have (he\as) wandered. i(^ l^abt (er :^at) ge^att, I have (he has) had. ic^ tin (er t^) gewefen, I have (he has) been, ic^ '6tn ^eworgetommen, I have come forth, ic^ I)a6e flttSgelegt, I have laid out. Subjunctive. _ i(^ X)abi (er f^ahi) gefungen, I have (he has) sung. i(| fei (er fci) gefprungen, I have (he has) sprung. i(^ ^abt (er H^abi) gerciet, I have (he has) spoken, id^ 5tn (er fei) gewanbert, I have (he has) wandered. i(^ 1^ahi (er fjobt) ge^att, I have (he has) had. i(^ fei (er fei) gewefen, I have (he has) been, ic^ fei l^er»orgefonimen, I have come forth, ic^ ^flBe fluagelegt, I have laid out. Pluperfect Tense. Indicative. i^ (er) l^atte gefungen, I (he) had sung. ic^ (er) l^atte auggelegt, I (he) had laid out. i6) (er) war gcfprungen, I (he) had sprung. ic^ (er) war l^eruorgefommen, I. (he) had come forth. i(i (er) |atte gerebct, I (he) had spoken. i^ (er) war gewanbert, I (he) had wandered. iS) (er) ;§atte ge^ait, I (he) had had. ic^ (er) war gewefen, I (he) had been. Subjunctive. tc^ (er) :^atte gefungen, I (he) would have sung, i^ (er) iatte auagetegt, I (he) would have laid out. t4 (ct) ware gefprungen, I (he) would have sprung, ic^ (er) wSre l^erDorgelontnten, I (he) would have come forth. 118 GERMAN GKAMMAK. id|.(cr) ptte gerebet, 1 (he) would have spoken. t(^ (er) wiire gewanbert, I (he) would have wandered. i(| (er) 'i)attiQii)aU, I (he) would have had. iH) (er) wiire gewefcn, I (he) would have been. Future Tense. liroicATiTB Mood. I shall ■ fingen, sing. Sing. 1. id} tuerbe fpringeit, spring. 2. tu wirjl reben, speak. 3. er ft)trt> wanbern, wander. Plur 1. tsir toerbeit ' ^fltctt, have. 2. i^r toerbet fettt, be. 3. fie teerfcen ]§er»or!omnten, come forth. ^ auslegen, layout. Subjunctive Mood. I shall ' fingen, sing. Sing. 1. i^ werbe ffringcn, spring. 2. i)u werbejt reben, speak. 3. er werbe wanbcrn, wander. Plub 1. wir toerben" ■^a'bcn, have. 2. t:^r ttierbet fein,. be. 3. fie iuertien l^crttortontttten, come forth. flu^Iegen, lay out. Conditional Mood. I should ■fingen, sing. Sing. 1. i(^ wiirte frnngen. spring. 2. bu mitrbeji reben. speak. 3. er witrbe toanbern, wander. Plue. 1. wir toiirfeen' ^a6en, ha,ve. 2. i:^r witrbet fein. be. 3. fie roiirben :^cr»orfomnten, come forth. ^ au^Iegcn, lay out. Sing. 1. ic^ tocrbe 2. btt wirjl d. er wirb Sing. 1. ic^ tBcrbc 3. er tuerbe THEOKETIOAL PART. 113 Past Future Tense. Indicative Mood. gefungen |a6cn, I shall have sung, etc. etc. flef))rungen feln, I shall have sprung, etc. etc. Subjunctive Mood. gefungen '^a'btn, I shall have sung, etc. etc. gcfprungen fein, I shall have sprung, etc. etc. Conditional Mood. Sing, i^ toiirbe gefprungen fein, ic^ tourbe gerebet ^aBen, I should have leapt, spoken. § 97. The Passive Voice is formed by the Past Participle and the auxiliary verb tuerben. The English have no Passive voice, properly speaking, and the iise of the German Passive, therefore, is for them the most difficult feature of the German Grammar. 3(^ tuerbe getiiitet is commonly translated by I am hilled, but should more properly be translated by lam being hilled; I am undergoing the action of, I am about being killed. He was saved is equivalent to he was safe, but er wurbe gerettet means he was being saved, and at last became safe. Passive Voice. Present. Infin. getieBt werben, gctieBt ju it»ert»en, to be loved. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I am loved, I am being I am loved, I am being loved. loved. Sing. 1. t(| werbe getteBt ic^ werbe getieBt 2. t>u wtrfl gelieBt bu werbejl gelicBt 3. er wtrb gelieBt, er werbe gelieBt, etc. etc. 120 GERMAN GRAMMAR. Indicative Mood. ■ Subjunctive Mood. Imperfect Tense. I was loved, I was being loved. I were, or I would be loved. Sing. 1. t(^ tourbe geliett i^ iniiriie getiebt 2. iu wurbe^ gclicbt iu iDurbefl getiebt 3. et tuurbe getiebt, er tpurbe getiebt, etc' V etc. Perfect Tense. Infin. getiebt tBorben fein, or ju fcin, to have been loved. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. He has been loved. He has been loved. Sing. 3. er ifl getiebt worbett. 'er fei getiebt tuorben. Pluperfect Tense. He had been loved. He had been loved. Sing. 3. er war getiebt ioorbctt. er ware getiebt worben. He will be loved. He will be loved. Sing. 3. er wirb getiebt werbett. er werbe getiebt werien. Conditional Mood. @r wiirbe getiebt wcrben, he would be loved. Past Future Tense. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. He will have been loved. He wiU have been loved. Sing. 3. er wirb getiebt worben fein. er werbe getiebt Worbcn fcin. Conditional Mood. Sr wurbe getiebt worben fein, he would have been loved. § 98. The following is a complete paradigm of a verb of the modern, and also of one of the ancient conjugation. THEOKETICAL PART. 121 COMPLETE PAKABIGM OF THE MODERN CONJUGATION. A. Active Voice. Infin. Iie'6en, ju HeBen, to love. Iotjicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I. Present. I love, I am loving. I love. Sing. 1. \6) ticBe i(^ Ixtlt 2. i)u lieifl i)tt tie-bejl 3. ev (pe, eg) liel^t, cr litlt, Pltjb. 1. tDtr IteBen Wtr lieBen 2. i^r Iie6t il;r tiefiet 3. jie liefien. |le liekm n. Imperfect or Past Tense. I loved. I loved. Sdtg. 1. tc^ liefete ii^ liefite 2. bu IteBte^ bu IteBtejl .3. er (fic, ti) Iie'6te, cr lieBte, Plur. 1. i»ir WtWn Xoxx IteBtcn 2. i:^r licttct i:^r lie^tet 3. fie Hettett. p^ lie^bten. in. Perfect Tense. Inpin. gelic6t l^aBen, getieBt ju iaBen, to have loved. I have loved. I have loved. Sing. 1. i(^ l^afie getieBt i&i '^alt gelieM 2. bu l^afl geliett bu :§aBe|l getieBt 3. cr :^at gelieBt, er |aBc getteBt, Plur. 1. wir :§(t6en gelicBt Wtr l^aBen gelteBt 2. i'^r :§aBt gcIicBt i^^r I)aBet gelieBt 3. fte l^aBen gelieBt. fie :^a'6en gelicBt. IV. Pluperfect Tense. I had loved. I had loved. Sing. 1. t(| '^atte gelieBt i* ^atte getieBt 2. bu ^attcjl gelieBt bu :§attefl gelieBt 3. er :^atte gelieBt, er :^attc gelieBt, 11 122 GEBMAN GKAMMAE. Ihdicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. Plue. 1. tBtr 1)attm gcliett 2. i^r %am gctiefct 3. fte :§atten getiett. tuir fatten getiebt i|r lattet geliebt rte :^atten getiebt. V. Future Tense. I shall love. I shall love. Sing. 1. id) mx'Dt: litbm 2. t)u tBirfl Uebert 3. er Wirt) lieBett, i^ werbe liebett in werbefl lieBen er werbe lieBcit, Pluk. , 1. wfr werben lieBen tttir werben HcBeit 2. i:^r werbet HeBen i|r werbet IteBeit 3. fie werben liebeit. fie werben licBctt, VI. Conditional Mood. I should love, We should love. Sing. 1. x6) wiirbe liebett Pluk. 1. toir wiirben lieben 2. bu toiirbcjl lieben 2. i|r witrbct lieben 3. er tpiirbe lieben, 3. f!e wiirben lieben. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. Vn. Past Future Tense. I shall have loved. Sing. 1. ic^ werbe geltefct ^^flfcen 2. bu iuirfl geliebt ^aben 3. er juirb geliefit :|aBen, Pltjr. 1. tpir werben geliebt ^bett 2. i:^r werbet gcliebt f^en feitt tnir witrtien geliebt worten fcin 2. bu tcurbcji gelieBt toorfecn fetn t|r wurtict gcltcBt worien fctn 3. cr tDitrbe gelieit worben fetn, fie wurben geliett worbeit fcln. Annotation. — Instead of {&) Wurbe getiett, bu Wurfee^ gctiett, cr wurbe gcIieBt, there is another form in use in poetry, — ii^ toarb geliefct, bu warb^ gcliett, er warb gclieBt, COMPLETE PAEADIGM OF THE ANCIENT CONJUGATION. A. Active Voice. iNrnsr. f^Iagen, ju fd^tagcn, to beat. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I. Present Tense. I beat, rout. I beat, rout. Sing. 1. ic^ fc^tage ic^ fc^Iage 2. btt ft^Iagjt bu fc^togefl 3. cr (fte, ti) fc^ISgt, er fc^tagc, PiUE. 1. bir f(^Iagett wir fd^Iagcrt 2. t^r fc^tagt i'^r fi^taget 3. fie fc^Iagett. fte fc^Iagett. H. Imperfect or Past Tense. I beat, routed. I beat, routed (should beat). Sing. 1. ic^ fd^fug i(| fc^luge 2. bu fc^tugfl bu fc^titgejl 3. er fc^tug, cr fcS^Itige, Plue. 1. tuir fc^tugcjt tDtr fi^Iugcrt 2. i^r f(^rugt «)r fc^Iuget 3. fte fi^Iugcn. fie fd^tugeu. m. Perfect Tense. Infin. gcfd^Iagcn 'i^abtn, gcf^Iflgen ju ^aBen, to have beaten. 11* 126 GERMAN GKAMMAE. Indicative Mood. I have beaten. SiKG-. 1. tc^ l^aBe gcfd^tagctt 2. i)u '^aji gcfc^Iagcn 3. cr f)at gefd^Iagen, Plue. 1. iBtr f^aUn gef(|tagen, etc. SuEjcNCTivE Mood. I have beaten, ■l^ ^a6e gef(|Iagert itt |a6e|l gefd^tageit er l^aBe- gcf(|rogett, tttr ;^a'6en gefc^Iogcn, etc. SiKG. rV. Pluperfect Tense. I had beaten. I had beaten. 1.- i(| |attc gef(|Iagen, ic^ l;atte gefc^Iagcn, etc etc. V. Future Tense. I shall beat. I shall beat. Sing.- 1. ii^ wevbe fc^togcit id^ tocrbe fi^Iagctt 2. iu tDirfl f^Iagejt iu tuerbefl [(^tagctt 3. cr wirb fc^Iagen, er toerie fc^tagen, Pltjr. 1. tsir werbcn fi^tagen luir werbcn fi^tagen 2. il)r tocrbet fi^tagett i:^r iBcrbet ptageii 3. f{e wcrten f(^tagen. |Ie werijctt fi^tageti. VI. Conditional. SiNGTJLAK. Plukal. I should beat, We should beat. 1. ic^ witrte f(|togett 1. tBir wiirtien fc^Iagctt 2. btt witrbe^ fd^tagen 2. i:^r wiirbct fd^tagcn 3. er witrbe f(!^Iflgcn, 3. f!e wurbcrt fc^Iagcit. VII. Past Future Tense. luDiCATivB Mood. I shall have beaten. Sing. 1. \&i tcerie gcfc^Iagcn f^(Atxi 2. itt wirfl gcfc^Iagen l^otcn 3. er Wirt) gefi^tagcn '^a'fecn, Plur. 1. n)irtt)ert)cngcfc^lflgcttl;a'6., etc. SuBjiniCTiVE Mood." I shall have beaten. {(^ tncrtie gefc^Iagcn |a6ctt iiu fterbejl gefc^Iegen ^'feen er werbe gcf^Iagett l)a6ctt, jDirwerken gefc^Iagen :^a6., etc. THEORETICAL PAKT. 127 VJULi. Past Conditional. SiHotrijiK. Plubal. I should have beaten, We should have beaten. 1. i^ tDurie gefi^Iagett '^aUn 1. »ir tBurten gefc^Iagen f^abtrx 2. i)tt tDurbeji gefc^tagejt '^abm 2. xl)x wiirtiet gcfd^Iagcn f)af>m 3. cr tourte gefd^Iagen '^altn, 3. fie wurben gef(^tagen ^altn, IX. Imperative Mood. 2. fc^Iagel ([(^tcige bu !) beat ! 2. f^kgt! (fc^tagt'i^r!) beat! 3. fc^tagcn ®ie ! beat ! X. Participles. Present. f(|Iagcnt), beating. Past. gef(^Iagctt, beaten. B. Passive Voice. Intin. gcfc^tagen tucrbett, gefc^Iagen 3U iucrben, to be beaten. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I. Present. I am beaten (being beaten). I am being beaten. Sing. 1. i(| toerbe gefd^tagen i(| werbc gefd^tagen -2. bu iBtrji gef^tagctt btt wcrbeji gefc^lagctt 3. er wivb gefc^Iagcn, er werbe gefc^tagett, Pluk. 1. ttir werben gefd^Iugen, wir werbcn gefc^lagen, etc. etc. II. Imperfect or Past. I was beaten (being beaten). I were (being) beaten. Sing. \. t(| wurbe gcfc^tagen, {c| tPiirbe gefc^Iagen, etc etc. m. Perfect Tense. I have been beaten. I have been beaten. Sing. 1. \&i Bin gefc^Iagen tuorben, id^ fei gefc^tagen worbeit, etc. ete. IV. Pluperfect Tense. I had been beaten. I had been beaten. Sing. 1. tc^ wax gefd^tagen worben, id^ ware gefd^Idgen worbett, etc. etc. 12S .GERMAN GKAMMAE. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. Y. Future Tense. I shall be beaten. I shall be beaten. Sing. 1. tc^ werbc gefc^tagen tBerbcn ic^ luerbe gef^Iagen werben . 2. i)u wtrfl gcfi^Iagen werben, iu tuerbcjl gcfc^Iagcn toet'i,, etc. etc. VI. Conditional Mood. Sing. 1. tc§ tourtie gefc^kgen werben, I should be beaten. YH. Future Past. Indicative Mood. Subjiinotive Mood. I shall have been beaten. I shall have been beaten. Sing. 1. i6^ werte gcfc|tagen wor* ic^ tocrbe gefc^kgen mxim i)cn feirt fein 2. btt wtrjl gcf(^I(igett tBor= iu wcrtcfl gcf(|Iagen tcor* ien fein, etc. ten fein, etc. "V 1 1 1- Conditioned Past. Sing. 1. ic^ wurbe gef^Iagen ttorben fein, I should have been beaten. COMPLETE PAEADIGM OF THE ATJXTTJATIY TRUB fein, TO BE. Infin. fein, stt feiti 1, to be. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mo I. Present. I am. • I may be, or I am. Sing. 1. ic^ Un tc^fei ■2. i)U 16i^ iiu feifl 3. cr tjl, er fei, Plue. 1. »ir finb ttjir fetcn 2. i^r feib i^r feiet 3. fie finb. fie feien. THEORETICAL PABT. • 129 Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. n . Imperfect. I was. I might be, or I were, Sing. 1. tc^ war ic^ ie'dxt 2. i)u warfl bu wSrejl 3. cr war, er ware, Plttb. , 1. tDtr toaxert wtr wareit 2. i:^r wart t|r waret 3. fte waren. fte wSren. nr, Perfect Tense. Infin. gewcfett feitt, gcwefett jtt fein, to have been. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I have been. I may have been. Sing. 1. t(| Un getoefen i^ fel gewcfen 2. H fiifl gewefen t)u fcifl gewefen 8. cr tjt gewefcn, er fei gewefen. Plttb. , 1. wir ftnt) gewcfen wir feien gewefen 2. i|r feti) gewcfctt i:^r fciet gewefen 3. fie |inb gcwefen. fie feien gewefen. rV". Pluperfect Tense. I had been. I had been (I might have been). Sing. 1. id^ war gewefen ic^ tuiire gewefen 2. t)u warfl gewefen i)u warefl gewefen 3. er war gewefen, er wSre gewefen, Plub. 1. ,wir waren gewefen Wir waren gewefen 2. t^r wart gewefen i'^r waret gewefen 3. fte waren gewefen. jie wiiren gewefen. V. Future Tense. I shall be. I shall be. Sing. 1. i(^ werbe fein i(^ toerbe fein 2. t>u wirfl fein iu werbeft fein 3. er wirb fein, er werbe fein, 130 GERMAN GRAMMAR. Indicative Mood. Plur. 1. tuir werfecn fein 2. i^r werbet fcin 3. fte tocriiert fein. VI. I should be, Sing. 1. ic^ tourbe fettt 2. bu tuuricfl fetit 3. cr ttitrbe fetn, Subjunctive Mood. toir werbett fein i|r werbet fein fie tperben fein. Conditional. We should be. Plur. 1. luir tnitrben fein 2. il)x wiirbct fein 3. fte jtturben fein. Sing. VII. Past Future. Indicative Mood. I shall have been. 1. i(| werbe getuefen fein 2. bu ttfirfl gewefen fein 3. er Wirt) getuefen fein, Plur. 1. wir werben gewcfctt fein 2. it)r werbct gewefen fein 3. fie Werben getuefcn fein. Subjunctive Mood. I shall have been, ic^ toerbe gewefen fein bu tucrbeji getocfen fein er toerbe gewefen fein, *B)ir tuerben gewefen fein \^x werbet gewefen fein fie werben gewefen fein. Vni. Past Conditional. SlNGUIiAB. I should have been, 1. i(| wurbe gewefen fein 2. bu wiirbefl gewefen fein 3. er wiirbe gewefen fein, Plural. "We should have been. 1. wir witrben gewefen fein 2. i|r wurbet gewefen fetn 3. jie wiirben gewefen fein. EL Imperative Mood. Sing. 2. fei, be ! Plur. 1. feien Wir I let us be I 3. er, fie, e0 fei, he may 2. feib ! be ! be! 3. feien ©te, be! X. Participles. Present, feienb, being. Past, gewefen, been. THEORETICAL PART. 131 COMPLETE PARADIGM OF THE ATTXILIARY TEEB ^aSett, TO HAVE. Infin. !^a'6en, ju fja'btn, to have. IifDioATivE Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I. Present. • I have. I may have. Sing. 1. i^ ^aU 2. t)u ia^ 3. er ^at, Pluk. 1. Wtr ^aUn 2. i|r S^aU 3. fte |a'6ett» cr I)a6e, tt»ir labeit i:§r ^abit fie ^^a^en. n. Imperfect T^ewse. I had. I had or I might have. SiNG.~ 1. i(^ :|attc 2. biil^atte^ 3. cr ^attc, Pluk. 1. ioir '^atkn 2. tt)r ^attet 3. f!c:^atten. i(^ ^tte i)u :|attcfl cr |atte, juir :|attert i|r ^ttet fte 'ij'atkn. m. Perfect Tense. Infin. ge^afit fjobtn, gel)att ju t)a6eit, to have had. Sing. Plttr. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I have had. I have had or I may have had, 1. {^ '^aBc get)a6t t(| fjaU gcl;a6t 2. iiu t)afl geljatt bu ^a'^cjl gcl;a'6t 3. cr :§at gc'^a'fet, cr '^ali gC^aBt, 1. lutr '^a'bett ge'^a'Bt tBtr ffobtti ge^aBt 2. tfjr "^aU ge^afit i:§r laBct gc^aSt 3. fJc l^a'&en gei^att. fte "^aUn ^aU. 132 GERMAN GKAJ lIMAB. Indicative Mood. SnBjimcTivK Mood. rV. Pluperfect Tense. I had had. I had had, I might have had. Sing. 1. ic^ :^atte ge^^fl'St iS) :^atte ge:^a6t ■ 2. i)tt :^athjl ge:^a6t iu l^attcft get)a6t 3. er :^atte gel^att, er ptte gc^aBt, Pluk. , 1. wlr fatten gel^att Wtr l^iiften ge'^a'6t 2. i^r :^attet ge^att i:^r :^attet gel^aSt 3. fte :^attcn ge^att, fie :^atten ge^a^t V. Fvture Tense. I shall' have. I shall have. Sdtg. 1. x6) werbe l^aBeit x6) tterbe t)a6eit 2. Sju wirfl l^aBen t)tt luerbejl tjabett 3. cr jpirt) l^atett, er toerbe l^oBen, Pluk. 1. tcir werbcn f^abtn j»ir tBerbcn ^a6cjt 2. t:|r luerbet l^atcn t^r werbet '^aben 3. fie toerben ^afcen. fie toerben :^o6eit. VI. Conditional. I should have, We should have. Sing. 1. i(^ wurbe l^aicti Pluk. 1. tuir tourbcn :^o6crt 2. t)U tuiirbell :^a6cn 2. i^r ttiirbet %altn 3. er tttitrbc l^oien, 3. fie tourtien ^aben. Vn. Pas* JWure. luDicATivB Mood. Subjunctive Mood. I shall have had. I shall have had. Sing. 1. tc^ srtcrbe ge'^att l§a'6ett i(^ tperbe gel^aljt ^(Avx 2. bu totrp gel^att 'ijObtn t)u werbefl ge|a6t |a6en 3. er t»irb ge'^att ^dbtn, er werbe gel^abt l^a'bctt, Pluk . 1. t»tr werben gelja'fct ^a'6en jBtr tuerben ge'^ait '^^(Am 2. i^r iuerbet gcl^afct l^abett- \%x iDerbet ge'^obt '^aBen 3. fie wcrben ge^'6t i^txbtix. jle wcrben ge^att ^, b, t, g, !, f. The u of the first sub- division enters into the Participle Past always before a liquid followed by a mute ; the o of the second subdivision always before a simple liquid or senuliquid and before cE, The vowel is always long in the Imperfect before one of the rough or semiliquid sounds c^, d, fi^, ff. Note 6. In er gilt, cr fd^llt, cr Ux% the t of the termi- nati(^n is thrown oflF after the radical t. 1 1 Second Class. §105 !. Mrst Subdivision. i (ie, ")/ —0/ —0 ■' e (a, i), au), — o, - — ; a, — 0, — 0* Infinitive. Imperfect. Fast Participle. fc^teBctt, to shove, push, fc^oi ^ong o) gcfc^otcn (long o) flieten, to disperse. floB geflo6ett itegen, to bend. Sog gebogm fliegen, to fly. flofl gcflogen toiegen, to weigh. wog gewogen liigeit, to tell lies, log getogen fcctriigen, to deceive, Bctrog tetrogett piemen, to flee. flo^ gefIo:§ert 3ie:§cn, to pull, tug, PSt geaogert * The verb tcmmsii is classified here because the. original radical vowel seems to have been i: timmeit, tamm, ^((pmmmj the forms tu timinft or ttmmff> a tumrat or timmt, being still in use as provincialisms. t In jiel;eit, }0g, geiogen, and in feitn, futt, gefvtten, a modification of the Anshtet is required by the modrfioatiou of the vowel ; 3 as Amlaut being a stronger aspirate than t), and the b in the Atislaut sounding always much like t, and after a short vowel like tt. THEOEETICAL PART. 141 InfimHve. Imperfect. Past Pa/rticiple. frleren, to freeze, fror gefroren Bcrlieren, to lose, Dcrlor Uerlorctt erliitett, to elect, choose, crfor, erforcn fcietcn, to offer. ]6ot geBotcrt jteben, to seethe, boil fott (short 0)* gefotten (short o) fltepen, to flow, fIof,^Z. floffen gcfloffen genief en, to enjoy, genof , pi gcnojfeti t genopn gief en, to pour, to gush, gop,;9Z..Sofen gcgojfert fd^tepen, to shoot, fc^of,^?. fc^offen- gefd^offen f^Itef en, to shut. fc^Iof,^?. fc^rojfcn : gefd^Ioffen fprief en, to sprout, f))rof , pi. ft )ro(fert gcfproifen Serbrief en, to grieve, serirof , pi. 'Offen Derbrojfen Irtec^en, to creep, crawl. Iroc§ gelroc^en riec^en, to reek, smell, roc^ geroc^en ttiefen, to drip, troff getroffen glimnten, to glimmer, gtomm geglommen lUmnten, to climb, flomitt • gettommen |e'6cn; to heave, lift. ]§o6 (long c ) ge^oBen (long o) wet en, to weave, iaoi getB0'6en Bewegen, to induce,t Ibewog :6et»ogen })flegen, to practise,! (Jftog gepftogen f(3^erett, to shear. fd^or gef(^oren ga^ren, to ferment. go^r gego:|ren fc^waren, to fester, fc^wor gefd^woven fd^tuoren, to swear, fc§»or % gefc^tBoren Infinitive. Imperfect. Poit Participle. Imperative. fe(i§ten, to fight. fo(^t (o short) gefod^ten ftd)t: fled^ten, to twine, plait. flod^t geflod^ten flic^t brefi^en, to thrash. brofd^ (irafdl) gebrofd^en brifd^ erlofi^cn. Ho be extin- Uerlofd^en, 1 guished. (ertofc^ \ tterlofc^ crtof(^en » erlifi^ uerlofc^en Berlifi^ * See note- 1 on page 140. t deiutgsn, to mo»e, has tetoegte, deieegt, and vflcgeit, to nurse and to use {to do), has vftegte, gevP'gt. 142 GEKMAN GRAMMAR. Jkflnitive. Jmpepfeet. Past Participle. Imperative. ntelfen, to milk, ntol! geittotten Jltitt fc^meljen, to melt, fi^molj gefc^motjen fi^inita quetlen, to spring forth, quoE , gequollen quitt fc|»ct(en, to swell, fd§i»off gefd^tuoHen fc^tBilt fd^atteit, to resound, - fc|oH gefclottett faufen, to drink (of beasts) foff gefoffen faugen, to suck, fog gefogen fc^nautien, to snort, fi^ttOS gefc^noBen f(|rau6ett, to screw, fc^roS gefc^roBen Note 1. The verbs tetletnmen, to straiten, and ra(^cn, to revenge, form thus only a Past Participle, 'bttlommen and gero(^cn, and this only in poetry. Of scrtuirren there exists a Past Participle Berworren, intricate, and another, ijerwirrt, confused; of Vtxfjtijltn, to conceal, 'otx^o'i^Un, but only in the form uniser^o'^Ien^ unreserved. QueMen, fq^meljen, fc^meflen, fteben, are inflected after the modem form, when used in a transitive meaning ; and the same holds good of the simple verb (of(^en, to extinguish, ©cwotcn, woven, is only poetical ; geweit takes its place in prose. Note 2. The second and third persons of the singular Present assume i in fei^tcn, fled^ten, t)ref(i)cn, lofc^en, tneltcn, fc^meljcn, quetten, fc^t»etten, and sometimes in gal;ren, fd^warcn, fc^eren, and ou in faufcrt ; as, t)U ftd^tfl (or fi(^ji), fli(^tfl (or flic^jt), t)rtf(^t, er erlifd^tj'i^mifjt, quttlt, [(^wiEt, ti gie:^rt, [d)»iert, tS fc^lert (in the saylf iuag fd^iert ii^ taS? what's that to you?), bu fauffl, er fauft. Note 3. The Subjunctive Imperfect is formed in the usual way ; as, fc^ofic, Biige, flo^e, floge, goffe, f^offc, roc^c, foffc, etc. ^ube, f(^»iirc, are about as frequent as ^66e, fi^toore. , Note 4. In poetry occur some antiquated forms of verbs with the radical vowel it, assuming the Umlaut eu in the second and third persons singular of the Present ; as, bu ticutjl, er fccirt (from ticten) ; bu fteug^, er fleugt (from fTiegen) ; ti fleuf t (from THEORETICAL PART. U3i fltef en) ; "on jeud^jl, cr jeugt, Imperative jeuc^' (from jie^eii) ; er lre«d}t (from lried)en). Note 5. The pupil may remark that the long radical vowel of the Inflnitive becomes short before the rough sounds d^, S, f, fd), ^; as, flte^en, flof ; hiec^en, tvoi^; triefen, troff; faufen, foff; — short vowels remain short; as, fle(^ten, ftoi^t; — long vowels before a liquid, a semiliquid, or a simple mute, remain long ; as, Derlieren, ttevlor ; flicgen, flog ; 'fcieten, iot ; fc^iefccn, f(|o'&. § 103. Second Subdivision. ei; i (short) ; t (short). Ir^niUve. Imperfect. (fi^) Beflcif en to apply one's self, Befli^, fccigen, to bite, li^ rei^en, to tear, rt^ fc^teif en, to slit, fc^Iip fd^meipen, to smite, fling, fc^mip fpleif en, to split, [(jltf erttet(^en, to turn pale, erfiUc^ glcic^en, to resemble, Q\i6) fc^feii^en, to sneak, , fc^Iid^ flreid^en, to strike, stroke, fhi^ wetd^en, to yield, tuic^ greifen, to seize, gripe, griff leifen, to chide, !iff tneifen, to pinch, Iniff fneipen, to pinch, to nip, fntp)) }5feifen, to whistle, to pipe, ^>ftff fi^Ieifen, to grind, . fd^Ilff ieitien, to suffer, litt fi^neibcn, to cut, f^nitt gleiten, to glide, slide, gittt reiten, to ride (on horseback), vitt [d^reiten, to stride, step, fd^ritt flreiten, to quarrel, flritt Past Participle, ■fcefltffen gebijiett geriffen gcfd^Itjyen gefd^mijfen gefrliffen erBIic^en geglic^en gefd^Uc^en gcjhid^en gewid^en gcgrlffen gellffen ge!ntffcn gelnippen gepftffen gefd^tiffen gelitten gefd^nitten geglittcrt gcritten gefi^ritten gcjirittcn 144 GERMAN GRAMMAR. § 104. Third Subdivision. ei ; ie (i long) ; te. Infinitim. Imperfect, Past Participle. fi^rcictt, tp cry, fc^rte gcfd^rten fpcien, to spit, fjjle gefpien 9etiei:^ett, to thrive, prosper, gebtel^ gebiel^en ret:^en, to lend, Ut^ gdk^tn itii)m, to accuse of, ^kj) gejic^eit Utiltn, to remain, lUib Qiblkitn xtihm, to rub, xieb gcrteBen f(|rei6cn, to write, fc^riefi gefc|rie6ert treiben, to drive, tviet getrte6e« mcifcen, to shun, mieti gemiebert ^(S^iVotn, to part with, divide, fc^tct) gef^ieben f{|iijcigen, to be silent, f<|toteg, gef^wiegen fleigen, to ascend, jlieg gejitcgcn fc^ettten, to shine, to seem, f(!^tert gefc^icnen pxd^tn, to praise, ifxiti ge()riefen Weifen, to show, Wicg gettiefen Note 1. The verb btcl^cn, to bleach, and sometimes even cr6Iei(^etl, are inflected after the modem form ; likewise fd)Iet« fen, in other meanings than that of grinding, wcic^en, to soak, sertcibcn, to render disagreeable, 'bcmttleibett, to pity, bcgleiten, to accompany, (from gelettcn, lettcn, to lead, not from gteiten) ; 6c» reiten, to prepare, and its compounds, are modem verbs. Note 2. Where the vowel is short in the Past and the Past Participle, the Auslaut is doubled, except where it' is an ^ or c§. In letben and [(^netben the b becomes tt as an Auslaut. The Subjunctive Imperfect is formed by simply adding e to the Indicative Imperfect; as, i(^ 6eflijfe mid), tc^ glic^e, griffc, littc, fc^rtee (this form is correct, the first e being mute, and i-e not being adverse to euphony), [pice, gebic|e, Mieie, fi^ttJtege, fc^iene, }>riefe. THEORETICAL PAKT. 145 Thikd Class. § 105. First Subdivision. Imperfect Ixitt rtet| fc^Iicf ftel te, t ; a. Injimlive. Btafcn, to blow, Braten, to roast, ratt)en, to advise, fc[)Iafen, to sleep, fatten, to fall, :§alten, to hold, keep, :^ielt fangen, to catch, ftng-(fieng) ^angen, to hang, lajfen, to let, leave, licp l^auen, to hew, cut, ^teB laufen, to run, Itef Past Pari. Pres. Sing. 2d ^ Sdpers. geblflfett bu itafejl, cr Blafl gcbraten bu Ixat^ er Brat geratl)ert bu ratt))!, ev xaf^ gefd)tafen bu fi^Ioffl, er fc^taft gefatten bu fadft, er fcittt get)alten bu |aUjt, er tjatt gefangeit bu fangfl, er fangt r;ing (I;ieng) ge:^angen bu pngfl:, er t)angt l^ei^en, to be called, I)iep jio^cn, to push, flieg rufeit, to caU, rief ' gelfljfen ge^auen gelaufen getjeifen gejlo^en gerufen. bu laffejl, er la^t bu I^auft, er f^aut bu lauffl, er lauft bu '^ci^ejl, er ^et^t bu flo^efl, er p6^t Note 1. S3rat, ratt), ^att are, on account of euphony, con- tracted from IraVt, riit^'t, pit't, the forms Bratet, rat^et being also in use. In Blafejl, lajfejl, the e is inserted for the sake of euphony; for the same reason both bu ^ci§t, bu |eifcjl, and bu (lopt, bu flogefl, occur ; also bu liiljl instead of bu |a(tjt (Ijaljl is pronounced, ^altji written). 2. The Subjunctive Imperfect is formed by adding e ; as, 16Iiefe, fcricte, etc. 3. The verbs fatten, to fold, fpotten, to split, faljen, to salt, and fc^roten, to shred, were probably originally inflected after the above conjugation, while they have now the modern form ; but there occurs a Past Participle gefalten, gefpatten, gcfaljen, gef(^roten, in an adjective sense. 4. {5teng and tjieng are now antiquated, ftng and |ing being pronounced short. 13 146 .GERMAN GRAMMAR. § 106. Second Subdivision. a ; u (long) ; a, Infinilive. Imptrftcl. Past Part. Pres. Sing. 2d # Sdpers. Bacfen, to bake, but gebaden t)u bactji, er Vddt fa|ren, to'go,* futji: gcfalren bu fa^rfi, er fat;rt graben, to dig, grut gegrabeit bu grdbjl, er grabt laben, to load, charge, lub gelaben bu labfl, er labt fragen, to a.k, frug (fragte) gefragt { ^ [jj^^ ^ ^Sj tragen, to carry, trug getrogen bu tragfl, er trogt fc^Iageit, to beat, f^Iug gefi^Iagen bu fc^fagfl, er fc^Iagt fc^ajfen, to shape, f^uf gcfc^affen bu fi^flffjl, er fd^afft tuflc^fcn, to grow, i»uc^S gcwad^fen bu wad^jl, er njac^jl: wafc^en, to wash, jBuf^ getoafc^en bu tpafc^jl, er toafc^t jlei)en, to stand, jlanb ((lunb) ge^anben jnat;Ien, to grind, gematjlen. Note 1. The second and third persons of the Singular of the Present are long when the first person and the Infinitive are long ; as, bu grabjl, er grabt ; bu tragjl, er triigt ; f^tagji, fi^Iagt; labjt, labt; fragfl, frcigt; fragjl, fragt. 2. In liibt the b only is heard, the t being added to show the derivation. Sabcjl and labct occur. J)u Wof^jl is written, jpafi^t is pronounced. 3. %xvi^ and fragte are both in use, the former especially in poetry. S3ut is written with one ! on account of the long vowel. S3o(Ite occurs also.t 4. ©c^affcn is inflected after the modem form when it means to work, to provide for. 5. ©tetjen is classified here because of its antiquated form, flonbctt ; flunb is poetical. The verb iitat)Ien, to grind, is regularly formed after the modern conjugation, with the above exception. * I. e. in a wagon or any other conveyance. t SSilt is transitive and intransitive, baifte transitive only ; not bdsISSvot i>aifte/ but 6lit; and fie Out or Hitt ban SSrot. THEOKETICAL PAET. 147 6. ^eirat:^ctt, to marry, fierat^fc^Iagen, to deliberate, tierantaf= [en, to occasion, Beauftrogen, to commission, and tv)iUfaf)vcn, to comply with, being derivatives of ^iixatf^, IRat^f(^Icig, Slntaf, Sluftrag, and an antiquated substantive SCittfa^r, are conjugated after tke modern form. § 107. Third Subdivision. e, ie ,i; a (long) ; e. iTifiniiive. Imperaime. Imperfect. Past Part. effeit, to eat, if af gcgeJTen freffcrt, to eat (of beasts). frif fraf gefreffett mejfen, to measure. nti^ mag gcnteffen sergcjfen, to forget. uergig Dergog Dcrgejfcrt gencfctt, to recover, gcnas gcncfen lefen, to read. lieg kg getefen fet)cn, to see. m fa| , gefel^m gefc^c|crt, to happen. gefc^a^ gef(i)e:§ett get en, to give. gic'6 (giS) ga6 gegefictt treten, to tread. tfitt trat getrcten ft^en, to sit, m gefcffett ■fcitten, to beg, bid, Ut gebetett licgen, to lie. lag gelegen fein (toefcn), to be, iuar gewefett. Note 1. The second and third persons of the Present Sing, have i when the Imperative has it; as, bu ijfejl (igt), cr igt; t)u frilJejt, er frigt; i)U ntijfeji, cr ittipt; iu »crgiffe(i (scrgift), cr »crgigt; bu tiefefi (tiefi), cr Iie(l; t)u ftc|jl, cr fte^t; tiu giebjt, cr giefet; bu ttitt^, cr trttt (one t omitted), ©encfen has bu gencfcjl, er gcneft, and no Imperative ; gcfc^e^en has ti gefcfeielt. Sjfcn, frefen, mcjfen, ttergefen, gcBen, and treten have a short, t in the Imperative and Present. 2. -©i^CTt changes the final consonant in fag (because a simple 5 (faj) cannot form the Auslaut after a simple vowel), gefcffett ; Ibat is written with but one t, as is geictcn, on account of the 148 GERMAN GEAMMAR. long vowel ; in lag and getegcit the vowel is of course long. All three form the Imperative and the second and third persons Present Singular after the modern form ; as, ft^e, t)U (t^efl, cr fi^t ; Bitte, bu tittcft, cr Bittet ; liege, iiu liegjl, er liegt. SBefen, the old form of [tin, had originally in the Imperfect wai, as in English. In gegejfen a g is inserted for the sake of euphony. J 108. IRREGULAR VERBS. Besides the irregular verbs fetit, f^abtn, and tucrben, only the following few are really irregular, the irregularity consisting in the - second class in a combination of the ancient and modem form. The radical vowel takes the Umlaut, while the termina- tion of the modern form is, nevertheless, added. Besides, in Bringcn, to bring, and benfen, to think, the final consonants ng and nt are changed into (^. (The same class of verbs is more numerous in English ; as, to seek, sought ; to work, wrought ; to fight, fought, etc.) I. Infinitive. Imperfect. Si^tmctive Imperf. Past Part gc'^en, to go, &m ginge gegangen flet;cn, to stand, flanb jlanbe gejtanbcrt tl^un, to do, t^ot n. I^rannte t^te get^an. Ixtnntn, to bum, fcrennte geBrannt fenncn, to know, lanntc Icnnte gefannt nennen, to name, nanntc nennte. gcnannt rennen, to run, rattttte rennte gerannt trtngen, to bring. Ixa^tt Ivad^tt getrac^t benfcn, to think. bac^te ba(|te gebac^t fcnben, to send. fanbte fenbete gefanbt wenben, to turn, tuanbte inenbete gewanbt. Note. — ©enben and luenbett are also inflected regularly after the modem form. The following verbs form the Singular THEOKETICAL PAET. 149 Present by a change of vowel, and without any termination in the first and third persons (like the Imperfect Tense of the ancient form) ; otherwise they follow the modem form. Infmitive. Present Tense Indicative. S biirfett ii^ barf, i)u txJrfji, er barf, tolr iitrfctt i^ iiirfe !onnen i(| Unn, ia fannji, er lann, wir !6nnen t(| fonne jnogen ic^ ntag, in ntagjl, er mag, »tr mogen i^ moge miiiJen i^ tnuf, bu tnuf t, er mufi, tuir ntiiffen ic^ ntiijfe foHen i^ foU, bu foEfi;, er foff, toir fotten i^ fotte wottert ic^ Witt, bu totttjl, er tuitt, ittir iuotten ic^ wotte ttijfen id^ wei^, bu tueipt, er iveif, ttir luijfett id^ wijfe J Imperfect. Past PaHiciple. ic^ burfte, etc. id^ bitrfte, etc. geburft or bitrfen i^ fonnte i(^ fonnte gcfonnt or lonnett i^ tnoc^te ic^ tniid^te gctnoc^t or ntogert i(| tnuf te i^ ntiipte gemuf t or mitjfen i^ follte tc^ fottte (fiittte antiquated) gefottt or fotten i(^ jBottte ic6sBDttte(wotttcantiquated)ge»ottt or wUtn iSj nsupte ic^ tBitptc gctpuf t. Note. — The difference between Wtflfcn and tennctt, which both mean to know, is the same as in French between savoir and connaitre, the former signifying the knowing of abstract truths and facts, and the latter the knowing of persons and con- crete objects in general. § 109. ©iirfen, fonnen, ntiigcn, ntujfen, fotten, and wotten are auxiliary verbs of mood, and have a complete conjugation through all tenses, persons, and moods, except the Imperative, which is formed only in gotten ; as, Witt, ttJottt, wotten. The corresponding English verbs, dare, ■can, may, must, shall, wiU, being defective in conjugation, and having no Participle Past and Infinitive, the English cannot translate the German Parti- ciple Past and Infinitive, nor the tenses and moods formed by their aid, except by circumlocution ; as, 13* 150 GERSIAN GRAMMAR. Infinitive. ParHcipk Past. biirfen, to be allowed. flcburft, been allowed.' jnogen, to like. gcmod^t, liked, mitflfen, to be compelled, obliged. getnu^t, compelled, obliged. !6nnen, to be able. gcfonnt, been able. foUen, to be bid to, to have the duty. gefoUt, been bid to. Joottcn, to be willing. getDoUt, been willing. Future. i(^ ttcrbe biirfcrt, I shall be allowed. id) tucrbc miigcn, I shall like to. ic^ werbe mujfen, I shall be compelled, obliged. ic^ iucrbe fonncn, I shall be able to. ic^ werbe foUen, it will be my duty. id) Werbe tooUen, I shall be willing. Perfect. ic^ ^dbi gcburft, I have been allowed. ic^ ^aBe gcmod^t, I have liked to. {^ %abt gcmu^t, I have been obliged. ic^ 1)abt gcfonnt, I have been able. i^ ^abt gefoUt, it has been my duty, I was bid to. ic^ f^abt gewottt, I have been willing. 'when an Infinitive is dependent on one of the Perfects or Past Participles of these auxiliary verbs, the Infinitive bitrfcn, tniigen, etc. is employed instead of the Past Participle ; as, tc^ laie, f atte, ptte effcn bitrfen, I have been (I was) allowed to eat, etc. id) t)ait, f)attt, i^'attt gc^en mitjfen, I have beflh (I was) forced to go, etc ic^ ^abt, ^attt, ptte Joetncn ntSgen, I felt disposed to weep, etc. t(^ ^a6e, ^attc, l^atte rcben !onnen, I have been able to speak, etc td^ ^a6e, |atte, l^attc frogcn fottcn, it was my duty to ask, etc. ic^ '^abe, l^otte, ptte ^iiren wotten, I was willing to hear, etc The same use obtains with the verbs faffen, fc^cn, l^oren, and l^elfcn, and sometimes, though rather incorrectly, (ernen and le^ren, when connected with an Infinitive ; as. THEORETICAL PART. 151 ic^ l^atc, |attc, ^atte bii^ wctnen lajfen (instead of getaffen),! let you weep. i(^ l^olJe, I)attc, ^tte ttjn gel^en fefert (instead of gefel^en), I saw him going, i^ I;a6c, ^atte, I}atte (te lac^cn ^iireit (instead of geprt), I heard them laugh. t(^ f^aie, 'i)atti, |attc i^nt arteiten ^clfen (instead of gcl^ctfen), I helped him at work. § 110. USE OP THE AUXILIARY VERBS ^ObtXl AND fettt. A number of verbs are formed with fetn, whose representa- tives in English are inflected by means of to have, viz. : — 1. ©ettt, to be, and nterbcn, to grow, become ; as. Perfect. ic^ 16irt gewefen, I have been, id^ bin gctuorben, I have become. Plvpeifect. ic^ war gcwcfen, I had been, i^ war geiBorben, I had become. Past Future. i^ wcrbe gcwtfcn fcln. i^ werbe geworljen fetn. Past Omdiiional. \^ wiirbe gcwefen fetn. ic^ wiirtic geworben fein. 2. All those intransitive and neuter verbs, expressing tran- sition of their subject from one condition into another ; as, ge= nefen, erwac^en, entflct)cn, etc. ; — or locomotion of their subject from one place to another ; as, ge|crt, rcitert, fa^ren, etc. 3. The following neuter verbs : tteiljen, to remain, Begegnen, to meet (with), folgen, to follow, weidjen, to yield, and those compounded with them, except Derfolgen, to persecute. 4. The following impersonal verbs : gefd)e^en, to happen \ gelittgen, gtiicten, gcrattjen, to succeed ; ntipUngett, mipglucEen, ntifratt)cn, to fail. ©cr ^ontg ijt geflorten, the king is dead. Wit ©inge finb entjlanbcn, all things have come into existence. £)cr SBintcr war »ergangen, the winter had passed away. 152 GERMAN GKAMMAK. * T)k iBIume ifl ttcrwctlt, the flower has faded. 3(^ "bin jeln ^oU gewac^fen, I have grown ten inches. T)ai Seber ifi eingefc^ntnusft, the leather has shrunk. ®aS SCaffer ijl gcfroren, the water has frozen. T)ai gcucr ijl auggegangen, the fire has gone out S)er Prattle iji genefen, the patient has recovered. Sag ©c^iff ijl gef(^eitert, the ship has foundered. ©iefeg SBort ifl »eraltet, this word has become antiquated. T)ai gieber ijl serfc^wunben, the fever has disappeared. (£r ifl getommen, he has come ; ®r i(i angetommen, he has arrived ; and all compounded with lommeit. Sr iji gefaHen, he has fallen. 63 ijl ntiv entfatteit, I have dropped it, atid It has escaped my recollection. Sr ijl getaufen, he has run. (£r ijl gcfprungcrt, he has jumped. Sr ijl gejloljen, he has fled. § 111. All other verbs are inflected with Tjaljcn, viz. : — 1. All transitive verbs ; as, j'ct)cn, get)ett, fc^tagen, tringen, etc. 2. All reflexive verbs ; as, ji(^ freuen, |i^ firgern, Jid^ betrii* )6en, ji(^ antcrn, etc. 3. All neuter verbs, except the above-named ; as, jle'^cn, fi^cn, liegen, jledett, etc. 4. All impersonal verbs, with the above exceptions ; as, ti f^a.t geregnet, it has rained ; ti ^ai gefc^neit, it has snowed. 5. All auxiliary verbs, except fein and wevben ; as, miigen, bitrfen, etc. 6. All intransitive verbs, -y^ith the exceptions mentioned in § 110; as, gepren, fd)atien, etc. § 112. The use of the auxiliary verbs fein and '^otcn being determined by the signification of the verb, it often happens that the same verb, according to its different significations, is inflected with- both ^aten and fein, or that compound verbs assume a different auxiliary from their simple verb, as will be seen by the following examples. • THEORETICAL PART. 153 3(^ '^aU ben n$ei)tni, perishing. Past, aueigegangeit, gone out. tsecgaiigcii, perished. Pres. auffieWent, putting up. bcfletlciit, ordering. Past. (Tufgefisttc put up, arranged. (jefleUt, ordered, made to order. Passive Voice. Present Tense. Ind. andSubj. ill) (^>^t^e aiifgc({et(t, I am put up. id) tocrte tcflellt, I am ordered. Imperfect Tense. Indicative, it^ ^Blll•^t aufgeflettt, I was it!) itjOTbe beflettt, I was ordered. put up. Stibjmictive. it^ rturbe aufgcfledt, I was i(|) iourbe btilttit, I was ordered. put up. Perfect Tense. Indicative, ill) bill mifgsflettt SDCrttii, I id) (liii bcffcttt t^)Ot^Clt, I have been liave been put up. ordered. Subjimclive. itji fei aiifgeflctit iuovtieii, I tc!) fei bt(lsttt toovten, I have been have been put up. ordered. Pluperfect Tense. Indicative, icj iBcir niifgclTctft ll)or^el1, I it!) loar (icffcitt ll)Ov^clt, I had been had been^put.up. ordered. Subjunctive, id) iuarc mifgejletlt Wctbeii, 1 ic|) loiue bcflellt Itjerbcit, I had been had been put up. ordered. Future Tense. Ind. and SubJ. id) itictbe aiifgcjf cttt iBCCbf ii, I id) i»er6c bcjTettt.JBMbeii, I sliall ba shall be put up. ordered. THEORETICAL PART. 157 With Separable Peepositions, etc. With Insepakable Pkefixes. Past Future Ind. and Suhj. id) iDtrte aufgcflettt loorben fetii, I shall id) »Bet6e btfteltt itjorteii fetn, I shall have been put up. have been ordered. First avd Second Conditionals ill) iBurte aiifgfflcttt i»tvt>cit, I should ici) loiirCc fceffellt Wntxu, I should be be put up. ordered, id) »t)5rli£ aiifgeflefft H)(lt^clt feiii, I iclp iDuvtis tjcjietlt »t>or6fii fsiu, I should should have been put up. have been ordered. Infinitives. Pres. aiifgtflctit t^)et^clI, ju locttcii, to btftit wttitn, ju Wcrtcit, to be or- be put up. dered. Past. (iiif3t(Ictlt iBOvSeii fein, movbeit Jit beficllt wovSeii fein, )it feiii, to have feiii, to have been put up. been ordered. Note 1. Thus are inflected all compound verbs of both classes. Those com- pounded with tiurt^, fiber, urn, iiiitst, ^§ 75-78, are, of course, capable of being inflected in both ways, according to their meaning; while i^)tc'^erl)o(elt, to fetch back, is inflected like aiif|?tttcn, and ttjictEvljo'leil, to repeat, like beffeHcii. Note 2. All verbs compounded with nouns and adverbs, like gutfjeif eit, tttej« ffidten, cmpcrtomineii, and the numerous class compounded with Ijer, Ijiii, and their compounds, and with compound prepositions and adverbs, like l)n<\b, I)iii« auf, boran, Ijctwavt^, etc., are also inflected according to au^geljen and auffieden. The following only are exceptions, and form their Past Participle and their Present Tense as follows: — Infinitive. Past Participle. Present Tense. . (jii) atgwSljneit, to suspect, ge(it3it>8()iit, * id) (irgtt)81)iic. t ( jii) btaiibfc^a^cn, to sack, , gcbrai)t>fc()a5t, i ii) braiitf(()afte. i (jit) fr5I)(f5cecn, to breakfast, gefrul)({Sift,cl)t(it3t, ii(Ifa()te. (jii) loeiffageii, to prophesy, grtociffagt, ic^ tociffage. Likewise the impersonal verbs e* g{attei(l, there is a hard frost, and ti H)ett«leii(t)tct, there is heat-lightning; and a few more of a comical significa- tion, that occur very seldom, like licbeiJteiictn, fdjlucifweticlii, fpeid)enec£ern. Note 3. There are a number of doubly compounded verbs that are inflected like Oni>i>ct«inmen or l)tnauf|TeIfcii, and bergeljen or befTeKen, at the same time, because they are compounded of a prefix and a compound separable adverb or noun. The following are examples : — Jnjinidve. Past Participle. Present Tense. anexUnnm, aimtexttttntn, anntmnt, id) erteniiean. aiiDerttaiieii, anjiibettrauen, anbtxtvaat, i^ tiectrane i>tl>ei)nUen, iexiubtiMteti, i)0tl>el)a(ten, ici)i)el)alteiioc. In the same way are inflected annttnmn, to acknowledge; auDertcaiieii/ to intrust; aufbel)«(tcn, anbcljalteii, to keep on ; tiiibecltibeii, to emlrody ; geii, to exact; aii^ixctnuftn/ to sell out; an^bettiigcn, to stipulate; um(>el)alteii/ to keep round one's self; ubctbel)(i(tfn, to keep over one's self; jiiruitbelialttn, to keep back ; ;iiTuctiieial)Un, to pay back ; iurucCfecclangen ; MtmyfeljUn, to recom- mend; anbefeljlen, to command, intrust; antietaumeii, to fix a term; avfbt' tBaljrtn, to preserve; (iei6e()ttttm, to retain ; bcigcfelleii, to associate; cinbetttftten, to report; etngefteOen, to concede; etngeit>SI)iteii. to accustom one's self to a places foctbcltiegen ; Ijcvaufibctommen, to receive change; iiiitcbcl)a(ten, to keep back; ftd) mitbeineibeit, to compete; mttentflel)ett, miterlangcn ; mitgeiiie^en, fii^ mitl)crfd)lD6ren, to conspire ; nuc^bcfjcaen, ii«cl)geiitepcii, iiadjuctliingcii, ntnljbf tctitm; itmgefiattett/ to transform; ijprbecciten, to prepare; Ijorbctcitten, to por- tend; t>(i:ljetbe(?tmineil, to predestine; tiorempfiiiben, to anticipate, have a pre- sentiment; sotciitlialten, to refuse, keep from; i)prbel)alteii/ to reserve; sctljct" ticvtuii»cii, to foretell ; fitl) intgbegf belt, to withdraw ; jiibctetten, to prepare, dress ; jiibetommeii, to get in addition; jiicvteitiicn, to adjudge; jitgs()$rcii, to belong; jitgefcffcit, to associate; jiigefltljen, to grant; juiuifberMfen, to recall; jufammfii' betiifeii, to convene. Note 4. Verbs like i>etabftt)ettett, to detest, tcnitttcitiigsn, to soil, Detaitlajfcit, to. occasion, feeranfctilageit, to estimate, and some more, are inseparable com- pound verbs, on account of the first component of the compound prefix, and are inflected like beiletlen. Note 5. The verbs anbetaiigcn, attbetteffcn, to concern, aiifetbaiicit, nitfet" ioticn, (iiifecf{el)eit, aiiferlegcn, to enjoin, impose, aii^eclefeit, to select, aueter< \r)ai)kn, are not inflected as such, but in their shortened form befongeiir betreffrn. THEORETICAL PAET. 159 etc. There occurs only a Past Participle, AttMWaijlt, auifcltftn, MMrtotta ; aiificflrtiibcii, dufcrlcgt, aiifenoecft, and a very few forms of the Present tense without any separation ; as, todrf micf) diibetrifFt or «itl>claiigt (but not e* aiit)e< ttijft mi(()) ; ttienn (Eljtifliis nit!)t aufetjleljt (but not Jeit auftrjlcljen) ; fo tie Xobteit nidit ouferUtljen (1 Cor. xv. 16). The verbs (obfiiigcn and Icbptfifm occur only in the Infinitive ; itiifetjie()eit only in the Infinitive and Past Participle. Note 6. The verbs mlf beljagen* to displease, mifgedSten, and mif[6er|ie()eit, are, because doubly compounded, with an inseparable prefix, to all intents and purposes like those with simple prefixes ; as, t(^ mipDetjTelje (not Oetflelje tnip), mifberfiaiibeit (Infinitive, mifjuDerffeljeii). All other verbs compounded with mtp are inflected thus : — Ijifiniiive. mifStittcn, to misinterpret, JH mipbciiteit ; mi^()itiibeltt, to maltreat, jii mif Oaiitedi ; miffbiaigen, to disapprove, jH mif biRigeii ;, mifbtaiitjjen. to abuse, ju mifibcauijpen ; mi^nauin, to distrust, jii miptraiicn ; mifleitcn, to mislead, •2U mipleiten ; mipfanttt, to displease, jit miffaircn; wipliugen. nitmigliiigtii; mipglfirfcn, to fail of success, 1 jit mi^glficf en ; mipratl)en, ( JU mi^ratOcn ; mtfgSimcn, to grudge, • j« mipgSiiiien; Past Participle. Present Tetise. mifbeutet and gemtf Seiitet ; id) mifSeute. mtfl)aiibe(t and gemifiljaiitiflt; id) mifljaiiMe. miFbiaigt and gemif billigt ; ic^ mi^binige. niifil)taiic!)t and gemt^braiicl^t ; ic^ mipbtauttie. miptcaut and_ gemi^ttaut; id) miftcaiie. mifileitct; i^ mif Icite. mtffaaen; tt^ mipfalfe. mifitungett ; ti mijiUiigt. mi^glucCt ; ti mipglScft. ffli^ratljen ; U mtftatl). mifgSnnt; id) tttifigSnite. The four verbs compounded with the prefix Ijoff', (see § 71,) and the six verbs compounded with the nrefix (jiiitet, (see § T4,) are inflected lilte bevgeljeii. 160 GERMAN GEAMMAR. CHAPTER IV. SXIBSTANTIVES. § 116. The declension of substantive nouns is to be con- sidered under three heads : Gender, Numher, and Case. There are three genders, the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter, and for each of them a particular form of the two articles, the definite (ber, i>ie, bag, the) and the indefinite (eitt, eine, cin, a). There are two numbers, a Singular and a Plural, and four cases in each, a Nominative, a Genitive or Possessive, a Dative, and an Accusative. p 117. Substantives are names of species of things or persons, expressing them in a general way. The article serves to single out an individual thing or person from others of the same spe- cies. The articles, therefore, in German, as in aH languages, agree with their substantives in Gender, Number, and Case. The plural of tlje definite article is the same for all three gen- ders ; the indefinite article can, from its nature, have no plural ; stiU the indefinite pronoun elnige may be regarded as a plural of it. The ancient German had no articles ; ber, bic, baS was originally a demonstrative and relative pronoun ; eitt, eittc, cin, a numeral. § 118. Declension of THE Definite Article. Masculine. Femitdne. Neuter. Plural. English. Nominative, ber * bie bai3 bie the Genitive, bcg ber beg ber of the Dative, bent ber bent ben to the Accusative, ben bte bag bie the. Note. — The German has no distinct Vocative case, the Nominative serving always in its stead. The Accusative of the Feminine and Neuter is always like the Nominative, in the singular as well as in the plural, in the declension of substan- tives and adjectives, as well as in the articles. THEORETICAL PART. 161 Declension oif the Indefinite Article. Masculine. Feminine. Neater. English. Nominative, ein eine tin a (anj Genitive, eines ciner ctne3 of a Dative, einent einer einem to a Accusative, einen eine ein a. Note. — The definite article is often conta-acted with preposi- tions into one word ; as 1. am for an bent, 3. an'3 for an bag. fceim for Ijei bent, auf 3 for auf t>as. im for in bent. i>urd)'3 for burc^ bag. loom for Bon bem. fiir'g for fiir bag. junt for ju bem. in'g for in bag, 2. jur for ju bcr. um'g for um bag. Some other contractions of this kind are common to the popular tongue, but more or less shunned by good writers ; as, wnter'nt, l^inter'm, uficr'm, ouf er'nt, for unter, l^inter, itber, auger bem ; unter' g, uBcr'g, :§inter'g, ioiber'g, gegen'g, for unter, iifcer, Wiber, l^inter, gegen ba«. But such as auf'm, aug'm, auf'n, buri^'tt, for auf bem, aug bem, auf ben, burc^ ben, are forbidden, as infringements of the law of euphony. § 119. Use of the Articles. The definite as weU as the indefinite article has much the same use as in English. A difference obtains in the following cases: — 1. In enumerations, both kinds of articles are commonly omitted ; as, ISalten Irad^en, ^Jfojien fliirjen, genfler llirrcn, ^tnber jammern, SKittter irren. {Schiller^ gort, ^u:^, ^a\l, ©d^mein, fort ^ii'^ner, Wli^ unb ®ier ! ( Gleim.) SBie gelb unb 9lu, fo '6tin!enb tm S^u. {GoetKe.) gjhifler rii:^rt ftc^ unb Oefelle in ber gret^eit I^eit'gem ®c§u^. (Schiller.) U* 162 GERMAN GRAMMAR. nen bte SBut| beS ©iegers entioaffnen. {ScMUer.) 2. When two or more substantives of the same gender and number are joined together, the article need be used only before the first ; as, 3)er iom, Stger, Sud^s unb SCoIf (tnb rei^enbe SEItcre. S)er granjofifd^e ^al»intjl f^atti mit bent reformirten ©enfcr, ©ng* ISnber, !Deutf(^en, ober ^oUfinber einen 33crul;runggpuntt. (Schiller.) But when the gender is different, this omission is faulty, and the article must each tinle be repeated ; as, ^od^ u6er ber 3fit «nb bem SRaumc tuctt leienbtg ber ^oc^fle ©Cbonfc. ((ScAiSer.) 3. The article is omitted in proverbial sayings and standing phrases, for the sake of eurythmy ; as, 5Dtt fotl^ iBater unb SOIutter SBci SLifc^c, at table. tf^xm. (Luther.) VLtbiX Slad^t, over night. Sr :^at 2Bei6 unb ^inb serlojfen. 3n 3eit/ ii time. SSon ^opf 3tt gup, from top to ^ot1j ffcid^t Sifen. toe. SKorgenjlunbe 'i^at ®otb im gjtit ©act unb faS. 9Jlunbe. 3u Sette gc^cn, to go to bed. ®cgen (nad)) ^lorbcn, to the Wlit SKann unb SJlaus ertrinten, North. to be drowned to the last ©egett (na^) ©iiben, to the man. South. $au8 unb J&of. ©egen (nad)) Dflen, to the Set ^ofc, at court. ' East. gn gu^ unb ju 5)ferbe, on foot ©egcn (nac^) SBejlcn, to the and on horseback. "West. 3u Jpaufe, at home. Note. — But in the following exceptional cases, and a few others, we use the article where the English does not : M ber ^anb, at hand ; jur ®ee, at sea ; jum Ueberfluffe, in abundance ; jum %xo^, in defiance, in spite ; jur Qiit ber Stot^, in time of THEORETICAL PART. 163 need ; bie ©))i^e itetett, to make head ; lit gluc^t ergreifen, to take to flight ; jur Slebe Hellett, to call to account ; am SDrte, am rec^ten Drte, in the right place ; juv re(|ten 3f't {or ju redjtet) 3eit, in right time ; am Snbe, at last ; im Srnflc, in earnest ; auf ben . aHarft ge^^en, to go to market ; in bic ©tabt gcljcn, in ber ©tabt IcBen, to go to town, to live in town ; in ble ©c^ule, ^irt^c gc'^en, in bcr ®d)ule, ^irc^e fein, to go to school, to church, to be at school, church ; jur SRu^e lommen, to come to rest; tnt 3'"^n, in anger. For a number of other examples, see §339. 4. Titles of books take no article, as in English ; as, bcutfi^e ©rammatit, a German Grammar. 5. The definite article never foUows the pronoun '6cibe, both, but either precedes it or is omitted ; as, bic Iteiben greunbe, the two friends, or fccibe greunbe, both the friends. The word aUti, all, has no article ; as, aUt Sanber, all the countries ; flttc SRcn* fdjcn, all men. It is not good German to say, atte bie ^ittbcr, all the children. 6. The definite article is used where the English does not admit of it ; — a) before substantives, to express the whole genus or species by a common, name ; as, bie gifc^e fc^Wtmmen unb bie SSiJgcI fliegcn, fishes swim and birds fly; — b) before the following common nouns, when personified : — ber SRcnfd^, man (mankind), ber ^ongref , congress, iai Zl)ux, animal, ber Slbet, nobility, ber ^ttnmel, heaven, bie ©emohatie, democracy, bie Srbe, earth, - bie ^atuv, nature, baa 3)arabiei5, paradise, bas SeBen, life, bie ^iJtte, hell, ber Zoi, death, ba3 gegefcuer, purgatory, ber Qu^aU, chance, bie Sfletigion, religion, bag ®Iiid, fortune, luck, iai S^rijlent^um, Christianity, bie Slugenb, virtue, bag 3ubent|um, Judaism, bag Sajter, vice, bag ^axlammt, parUament, bie J^ojfnung, hope, 164 , GERMAN GKAMMAE. ier SLag, day, iai ®efe^, law, tie 9lad^t, night,' tie @ef(^ic^te, history, t)er St)cjlant), matrimony, bie 3^1^/ ti^^^e. i>a3 ©c^idfot, fate, c) It is also used before similar nouns, expressing the person or thing in a dignified way ; as, 2)a3 Scfcett tfl lurj, bie ^un^ ift lang ( Goethe), Life is short, art is long. ^ Ste 2Cci6er ftnb leufc^er als bie 9Kanncr, or ©ag SBciB ip Ieuf(|cr al^ bcr SJJlann, Woman is more chaste than man. •Die Slugenb, |te if! !ein Icerer 3Qaf}n {Schiller): Infinitives and adjectives employed substantively have the article ; in EngUsh, only the latter ; as, S5a3 ©prec^en ifl bent SJlenfc^ett tiatitrtic^, Language is natural to man. 3d^ liek iai Steifen, I like travelling. ®ie Slrmcn jinb oft glitilli(^er aU bie Sleic^ett, The poor are often happier than the rich. 7. The definitive article must be placed before the proper names of days and months and seasons ; as, ber ©onntag, ber ^ 3uni, ber .&er6|i, and the words griitjjtiirf, breakfast, SUlittagg* ef[en, dinner, 3lbenbef[ett, supper ; — the names of moimtains, rivers, lakes, seas, forests ; as, ber 3trarat, Ararat, ber SSejuB, Vesuvius, bie St6e, bie 9Zorbfec, ber Sobenfce, ber ©c^worj^ tualb ; — all masculine and feminine names of countries ; as, ber .^aag, the Hague, bie ©c^weij, Switzerland, bie 5)fal3, the Palatinate, bie SKoIbau, Moldavia, bie ^rim, Crimea, bie SLiir* let, Turkey, bie SBoUad^ei, Wallachia, and all names of coun- tries terminating in ei ; — all names of countries used only in the plural ; as bie SSereittigtett ©taateit, the United States ; bie SJtieberlanbe, the Netherlands ; — the names of all coun- tries, and all proper nouns when connected with an attributive adjective ; as, bai8 fc^iine grajifreic^, fair France, bag glu(fti(|e Slraticit, Ai-abia Felix, ber utt^erBlic^e ^umfiolbt, immortal THEOKBTICAL PART. 1G5 Humboldt, ber Hnn^tt 9Jero, nefarious Nero, hex axmt Sotjann, poor John, tie |lotje SSlaxie, proud Mary; — and before all proper names connected with titles ; as, bie ^ontgin Wnne, Queen Anne, ber 9)rafit)ent S3u(^anan, President Buchanan. 8. Proper names stand without an article in all other cases ; as, griebric^, 3o:^anna, granlreic^, Dcutfd^Ianb, Itnerifa, aGni'(;= tngton. But in speaking in a familiar way, they sometimes assume the definite article; as, bcr SSaUenftcin, ber SEeU, bic Slgrippina, bcr %xi^, Frederic, bie $anna, Jane. The plural always takes it ; as, bie SJlebiji, bie ^oratier unb bie Suriatier, bie SubWtge uon i^xantxei^. And in the Accusative, Dative, and Genitive cases, the article, with the noun proper unin- flected, is sometimes, on account of distinctness, preferred to the inflected noun proper ; as, rufe ben grott} ! call Francis ! fud)e bie ©ufanne ! go for Susan ! ®r Qoh betn Slugujl ®elb, he gave money to Augustus; Sofar fe^te ben Dftasian an ,S:tnbe^flatt ein, Caesar adopted Octavianus ; ic^ erinnere mt(^ beS Dasoufl, I remember Davoust ; beg .^eer beS 3ter):eS, the army of Xerxes. 9. The article of a substantive connected with a genitive which is placed before it, is commonly omitted ; as, beg 25aterg ©egen taut ben ^inbern ^iiufer, afcer ber 9}lutter %\n6) reip fie Wieber nieber (Luther), The father's blessing builds houses for the children, but the mother's curse destroys them again. See § 290, Note 2. 10. The definite article is employed instead of the indefinite in sayings like the following : — twice a week, jtoeimat bie 2Bod)e ; ten cents a day, je^n Sent ben Eag ; four dollars a pound, ijicr 2)ottar b a g 5^funb. 11. The English a is not translated in German in sayings like the following: — a few books, ttienige (or einige ioenige) SBiii^er ; a hundred times, l^unbert 9)Zate ; a thousand years, tau« fenb 3a|re, The English the in the following is never trans- lated ; as. The following persons were present, folgenbe 9)erfoncn Waren jugegen. 12. The EngUsh arrangement of words, is not imitated in 166 , GEKMAN GKAMMAK. German in sayings like the following : too great a danger, eirte ju grope ®cfa^r; so large a city, cine fo grope ®tait; half the country, baS f)alii Sani ; both the brothers, tie Beiben 33riiber. 13. The article is sometimes added to indicate the case, where it could, not otherwise be pointed out; as, iai SeBen t)er 9Jlcii= fd)en, the life of men (but in iaS itbtn grower Sltenfc^ett, the life of great men, the ai-ticle is not required, because the Genitive is pointed out by the termination of grower). 14. Names of Abstract nouns do not, as a rule, require an article, except when they signiiy actions ; as, ber 3JJcnfA rnup SWu^m uni) STabel crtragen lernen (Goethe), man must learn to bear both praise and blame; ®Ieic^e3 ©trefien iiniiet ^tti wnb ©letter (Goethe), a like striving unites hero and poet. But, b e r ®ang nad^ bem ®ifen|ainmer (Schiller), the walk to the forge; etn ®(^r,et ertontc, a cry resounded. But even names of conditions and qualities frequently take the article, not only when the abstract notion is individualized, — :as, itx 8rte= ben ber ©cele, the peace of the soul; bie Siebe einer 9Jlutter, the love of a mother, — but also when the abstract idea is gen- eralized, expressing the whole of the species or genus ; as, bie Siebe ina^t ben 33ettter reic^ ( Tieck), love makes the beggar rich ; bie B^tt 'OtXQtljt, time passes away. 15. Names of materials do not commonly require an article; as, Tlil^ trinten ; ^olj Ibrennt ; ©teinc nic^t ; faiirer 2Bein ; fetner ©anb. There are only two exceptions : — 1. When one species out of several is individualized ; as, etn ©alj unb cine ©Sure d)emifc^ Ucrbtnben, to combine chemically a salt and an acid ; etn I)arte3 .^olj au^lua^Ien, to choose a hard kind of wood. 2. "When the whole of a genus or species is taken together in a general way; as, ber SBein erfteut be3 SiJlenfd^en .^erj (Goethe), wine gladdens the heart of man ; bag Sjnedfilber t|l etn flitfftge^ fKJfetall, quicksilver is a liquid metal; bag ai5a|[er t(l farbtog, water is colorless. 16. Collective substantives are used with or without an article. THEOEETICAL PAET. l-B?" according to the meaning; as, bag 25oIf fieljt auf {Kbrner), the people rise ; e i n SJolt i(l einem elnaelnett 2)ienfd^en ju »er= gtei(^en {Hdi), a nation is to be compared with a single man; titc SSiilfer fd)moc§tcn nai^ grcil)eit, the nations languish for freedom; SSolfer Miil)en auf, SBoHer Beritit^en, nations spring up, nations fade away ; tx |att 33le^, he keeps cattle ; bag SSiet) I^at ft(| uerlaufen, the cattle are straying. 17. The indefinite article is often omitted with nouns used as predicates or in apposition ; for instance, x&j Bin Setter (or ein £et;ret), I am a teacher ; Se'fecn iftST^^atigfeit, unb SEt;a= tigfein ifl £ e b e n ; eS ifl © i 1 1 e in ©eutfc^tanb ®efunbt)cit gu toitnfi^en, iuenn Siner niefl, it is the (a) fashion in Germany to wish good health when one sneezes. 18. The following idiom obtains in German, as in English: nur inSBelmar tonnten ein ©critter, ein ®ott)c, ctn Berber, ein SBicfanb fid) ju bent augfiitben, was fte geworben fmb, men Kke SchUler, Goethe, Herder, and Wieland could only in Weimar develop , into what they became (ein ©critter is elliptical for ein SKann wie ©(^ttlcr). ©ergteli^en ifl nur einem 9la)>oIcott BtogIic§, the like is possible only for a man like Napoleon. Thb Gender op Substantives. § 120. The gender of substantives is either natural or gram- matical. All languages, more or less, acknowledge the mascu- line gender of male persons and animals, and the feminine, gender of female persons and animals, by conforming the gram- matical gender to them. Der SiJJann, the man, and bet £)6^i, the ox, are grammatically masculine, bie ^xaM and blc B-ul) grammatically feminine, because they are males and females by nature. Still, like every language, the German also in- fringes this law in a few exceptional cases, for grammatical reasons. The following are these exceptions : — 1. Sag aCel6, the woman, wife, and bag 5Kenf(^, the wench, bag grauensimmcr, bie aBeiBg))erfon, the female (person), bie SWanngpcrfon, the male (person), bie ©(^itbWod)e, the sentinel. 168 GERMAN GRAMMAR. Also, all diminutives of males and females ; as, iai SKatx^cit, the girl ; bag grduteiit, the young lady ; bag Rn'dhd^m or ^na6* lein, the little boy ; bag ©attg^en, the little goose. 2. Some larger, as well as the domestic animals, have a mas- culine gender for the male, a feminine gender for the female individuals, and a neuter gender for the generic name, without regard to sex ; as, — Mascidine. Feimnine. ' Neutir. Ut ^eiigfl, stallion, Ut SBaHad;, gelding. bie ©tute, steed. bas 9)fetb, iai SRoff, horse. ^el• 0(l)fe, ox, ticv S3iit(e, bull, bie ^itl), cow. baS giiiib, cattle. »«' dbn, boar. bit ©ait, sow, iai SAflvem, hog, swine. bdtf Sriuttetfdjttf, ewe. ■ b«« ©djaaf, sheep. in Sitgenbocf, j ^ , berScirtoct, j ™ so^"' bliah'^^ baS gicgeiifcicl), goats. bet •?)at)n, cock, rooster, bie -Jieiiiic, the hen. b«S .^itOn, chicken. *« ©anfcrici), ^ Hsv (Snnfct, ^ ' let giiteritfe, drake. bie ®iiit«, goose. ba!« SnnfeDoie. bie Siite, duck. bn^ Siiteiibofe. bet Xaiibtt, male pigeon. bie Xaube, dove. bii* Xaubenbolt. in -Ottfct, stag, deer. j bU *Ufctit..l,, hi„3 ( bic •pinbtn, bet -fiitftt. in giel)f)OL-f, roe-buck. bie SReljfiil), doe, bo(i CRei), roe. icr •J)UH>), dog, Pj'*"f"'' bitch, ( bte SSefte, ' bet .£)uiib. in Mam, male cat, bic ^a6e, bic ^aftc. Set iSwe, ten, the lion, bic iSiBin, lioness, bet tSloe. in Xiger, tiger, bic Xigeriii, tigress, bet Xijet. bee aSac, bear, bic SStiii, she-bear, bet Sat. ber ifficlf, wolf. bie aBSlfiii, she-wolf, bet aBctf. bet Slid;*, fox. bie g"*!""/ she-fox. bet Siidj*. "Where the language has not formed generic neuter names, the masculine serves as such, and in a few cases (like bie .Ko^c) the feminine. In a few other cases compound nouns are used ; as, bag QiiQin'okl^, bag OanfeBoIt. All other names of animals are only generic, and when the male or female is to be dis- tingnished, a compound is made use of; as, bag SIe))l^anten= mann^en, bag Step^antcnWeiBd^en, the male and the female THEORETICAL PART. 1C9 elephant, or img ntanntidje and bas 'h3eiHid)e ^amnl, the male and female camel ; icr Jtanaricn()a()n and tie Manavim'er Dejem* In, bcr ©onntag, ber ©onitabcnti. But baS grul)ja{)r, the spring, baS 3fl^t, the year, and all its compounds, are neuters, and b I e SKitttBOC^, Wednesday, is as often found as b e r SKtttWoi^. 2. The names of stones and mountains are masculine ; as, ber ©rantt ; ber Safalt ; ber 3luMn, the ruby ; ber SKontblanc ; ber St, ©ott|arb. Except those compounded with ba3 ®e6irge; as, ba3 Sr^geBirgc, the Ore Mountains. 3. The names of winds stad. points of the compass are m.ascu- l{ne;as,itx D^en, ber SfJorben, ber ©iiben, ber 2Bejlen, ber Storb^ ojlen, etc., ber Djiwinb, ber 3^P^'9^t i'^r ©tuvm, ber S33tnb, the •wind, ber IDr!an, hurricane ; but bie SBinbgtraut and bie S3o, the gale, axe feminine. 4. All proper names of rivers with Gterman names are femi- nine ; as, tie Site, bie ©onau, the Danube, bie S)una, bie £ena, bie SGefer, bie £)ber, bie 2Bei(^fet, bie 9Jlemel ; except ber 3{^ein, Khine, ber 'Main, Main, ber ^tdax, ber 5)rut^, ber £ec^. AH others are masculine, because the appellative glu^ (masc.) is added in thought ; as, ber ^bfon, ber 9W, ber |)o, ber Zibn, ber SJlifitfjippi, ber Slmajonenflu^, and moreover ber 2a 5>Iata, ber sQuorra, ber ©fc^umna, and most rivers out of Europe. 5. Proper names of countries, cities, towns, and places are neuter; as, 3lmertfa, SJfafftti^ufettg, SBojion. But those ending in ei, c, a, or ftu are feminine ; as, bie Siirlet, bie £c»ante, bie Ufraine, bie SCetterau, bie 33u!otBtna, bie ^erjcgotoina 5 also bie Wlaxt, bie ^rim, bie ©c^Weij, bie ^fafj. Masculme are ber $aag, ber ^^eloponneS, and aU compounded with ber ®au, the county ; as, ber 33reisgau. 6. The names ot most flowers, fruits, and trees are feminine ; as, bie Slofc, bie 5Ju^, nut, bie ©ic^e, oak. Those compounded with ber Saum, ber ©traucfe, ber ©uf^, are exceptions ; as, ber IpfcIBoum, ber Slofenjtraud^, ber $afeI6ufi^. 7. The names of metals and most materials in a raw state are neuter; as, bag ®olb, bag ®il6er, bag Sifen, iron; — except ber THEORETICAL PAKT. 171 ®iai)i, steel, bcr S^omBfll, pinchbeck, ber ^oBfttt, bcv and "iaS 3inf, ber and bag SCi^tnuH), tie and bag ^^latina. Neuters are bag ^otj, bag aCaffer, bag SauB, bag Jpeu, bag ®rag, bag ©lag, bag grj, bag 3«etalt, bag mimxai, bag Del, bag ©atj, bag Sett, etc. 8. All names of things not originally substantives, when em- ployed substantively, and even all sayings and sentences em- ployed substantively, are neuters ; as, bag 21, bag 23, bag 2Cenn unb bag Slber, bag ©(^one, the beautiful, bag ®utc, the good, bag SReifen, travelling, bag Sefen, reading, bag „Setc unb ar= Beite," the proverb ara et labara, bag „®ein ober 51id)tfein," the to he or not to be, bag „25crtrauc auf ®ott unb ^a(te bein 5)ut»cr troien." 9. All compound nouns assume the gender of their last compo- nent ; as, ber ©olbring, the gold ring; bie ^inbeglieBe, filial love ; bag ^erBjlwettet, the autumn weather. But see § 129. § 123. The form or derivation determines the gender in a grieat majority of cases, viz. : — Monosyllabic nouns and those compounded with monosylla- bles by means of prefixes are masculine, when not terminating in t (those in t being for the most part feminine). § 124. The following exceptions must be committed to mem^ cry: — a) Feminine Monosyllables. (All marked thus * have two genders, but with a different signification. See \ 131.) btc 3tc§t/ proscription ble 33runjl, conflagration bie Sfngfl, anguish bie 93rut, brood bie 2lrt/ manner, kind bie 33uc^t, bight bie 9ftt or Slue, dale, field bie S3urg, castle bte 9l):t, axe bie %oX)xt, passage, drive in a bie 33a^n, road vehicle bie aSant, bench, bank bie gaufl, fist bie SBai, bay bie gtu^t, flight bie Sruji, breast bie gtur, field 172 GERMAN GKAMMAE. t)ie glut^, flood bie 2u|l,^ pleasure W gorm, form bie Wa^jt, miglit i)ie grai^t, freight *bie SJiar!, boundary (march) tie grift, term *bie 9Jtarfc^, marsh W gruc^t, fruit *bie SJtaft, mast, fattening i»ic gurc^t, fright, fear bie Wlani, mouse tie gurt, ford bie 9}laut|, excise tie @ic^t, gout bie midi), milk tie ®ter, greediness bie Tlili, mUt bie ®Iut^, glow bie 9loc^t, night iie ®ruft, grave bie ^a% seam bie ®unjl, favor bie Stotf, need *ye ^aft, prison bie SiJutt, zero ik $ont)/ hand bie ^u^,* nut bie ^aji, haste bie 55ein, pain tie ^(tut, hide, skin bie ^ep, pestilence bte ^ulb, grace bie g)flic^t, duty *l)ie §ut, guard bie 5)ojl, post bie 3ft(^t, yacht bie 9>rac^t, (pride) splendor tie 3a9t), chase bie Quat, torment i)ie ^luft, clefl bie iRflfl, rest tie ^o|l, food, fare bie 3lu|r, dysentery tie .Kraft, force bie ©aat, seed tie M\in% art bie S^atit, shame bie ^ur,' cure, election bie ec 'itb^i^nt, abhorrence, is masculine. THEORETICAL PART. 173" tie ill, injury. Note. — The seemingly abnormal gender of so many monosyllabic feminines is to be accounted for by their derivation. The majority of words in the above bie SLrac^t, load, costume bie SErift; pasturage bie U^r, watch bie 3Ba(|t, watch, guard bie aCa'^I, election bie 2Banb,' wall *btc SQi^v, defence bie SBelt, world bie SBuc^t, weight, impetus bie SBuIjl, pad bie SBur^,* sausage bie 3B«t|, rage bie SaS^l, number bie Qdt, time bie S^^^i ornament bie Qu^tt discipline bie 3««ft/ guild. 1 Set ©ee means lake. 2 Sie &(l}t occurs only in the phrases bet &^t, at sight; nt, in sight. ' Siorivaiib, pretence, and '^iiflvanb, outlay, expense, are mascuhne. * ^aniWnxfi, jack-pudding, is of course masculine. 15* 174 GERMAN GEAMMAE. list is made up of words ending in t (or t() or (!) derived immediately from roots, witli or witliout the Umlaut, with the addition of t to it, and are on account of this addition feminines ; while all similar derivatives formed with- out this termination, and those in which the t was already the Auslmtt of the root, are masculines or neuters. The language seems by the different gender to have pointed to the difference of derivation. Besides, all of these feminines in t are, or were originally, abstract nouns, a feature which distinguished them, not only from the mascuhnes in t; — as, in Sart, beard; tier Slirjl, thirst; ia 25tift, vapor, fragrance; 6cr ©aft, sap, juice; itx, ©c^aft, shaft; Sec Xnfft/ taffety ; ^ct ^ovt, hoard, protection; in SRaiift, edge of a bread-crust; bet ^iirfi, mattocli, hoe; btr SSafl, bast; bee aRojl, must; ber Ito(i, solace; bet 2)uiijl, steam, mist; bet SRiff, dung; bet ©ifc^t or ©aftjlt, froth, yeast; bet SraOt/ wire; bet dliajl, tassel; wtdoh, with the exception of 35ur(I, Xrojl, are concrete nouns, and, with the exception of IStaljt, ©«ft, ©cljaft, SKaiift, i3ifc()t, have t in their root; — but also from the few neuters in t; as, iiilt, desk; SHedjt, right; ©djeit, log of wood; ©((jtct, shot; ©(^loett, swprd; ©tift, foundation ; SBoct, word ; gctt, tent ; among which, with the exception of 'ilmt and Siec^t, no abstract nouns are to be found, and with the exception of ■&aii))t, -^eft. Sift, none in which the final t does not belong to the root. The intention of the language'seems, therefore, to have been this, — that while the monosyllabic names of things derived from roots, when masculine or feminine, should be abstract nouns, and when neuter, concrete nouns, those monosylla^ bio names of tilings derived from roots by adding t should be feminines and ab- stracts, and when the t belonged to the root, masculines or neuters and concrete. Among those monosyllabic feminines not terminating in t, a number in an- cient High-German terminated in a, and were therefore words of two syllables, and feminines ; as, 0.iia(, 9'til', ©dpam, ©<^at, 3al)l, — in ancient High-German Ouata, 9}ina, ©cama, ©cata, gata; and the presumption is that all such words have the same origin. h) Monosylkthic Neuters. baS 3la«, carrion iai 33itb, picture bag Slmt, office baS SBIatt, leaf J)aS SSai), bath bag Stec^, tin-plate *tias 33ant)/ ribbon, tie bag SIci, lead bag 33eet, flow,er-bed bas S3tut, blood bag SSeil, hatchet bag SSoot, boat bag Sein, leg, bone bag S3ret, board bag SSett, bed bag SSrot, bread bag Sler, beer .bag S3uc^, book THEORETICAL PART. 175 *t>alS3uttb, bundle "nai T)a^, roof iai Tiaui, ace, deuce iai ©ect, deck bag ©od^t,' wick iai Ding, thing iai S)orf, village, thorp bag ®t, egg bog Sig, ice bag @rj, ore bag Sac§, compartment bag ga^, vat, cask bag getb, field bag gett, skin, pelt bag gcjl, feast, festival bag gctt, fat bag gleifc^, flesh, meat bag glof , raft bag govt, fort bag ®arn, yam bag ®ctb/ money- bag ®ift,^ poison bag ©tag, glass bag ©leig, track of a wheel bag ®Iicb, limb, member bag ®Iiicf, luck bag ®otb, gold bag (Bxai, grave bo^ ©rag, grass bag ®rof, gross bag ®ut, property, estate bag Jpaar, hair bag ^arj, resin bag ^aupt, head bag .^oug, house bag §eer, army, host bag $eft, handle, hilt bag $eit, salvation bag §emb, shirt bag ^eu, hay bag J^trn, brain bag ^olj, wood bag ^orn, hom bag 3a'§r, year bag SoS}, yoke bag ^tnn, chin bag ^teib, garment, cloth bag ^nie, knee bag ^orit, corn bag ^raut, herb bag ^reuj, cross, crest bag Sanb, land bag Sauti, leaves, foliage bag Ceib, suffering bag Sic^t, light bag Sieb, song, lay bag So6, praise bag 8o(|, hole *bag Sol^n, wages bag Soog, lot bag Sot^, ounce, plumb-line bag SJJa'^t, meal, repast bag mai,^ time bag SJtalj, malt 1 S>ai Sot^t and btt !Dod)t, wick, are equally in use. 2 Sie OTitgift, dowry, derived, like ®tft, from gebcn, is feminine. s As employed in i>in ai?«!, jsljit SWal, four times, ten times. JWat, mole. 176 GERMAN GKAMMAR. *t»aS Wlavl, marrow iiag 9Jtap, measure taS SlZauI, mouth, maw bag Wlnx, sea bag SJJe:^!, meal, flour *bas SJJenfi^, wench bag 9WetI, mark, sign bag Sltoog, moss bag SKug, pap, jam bag Staf , wet substance bag 5Reji, nest bag SRe^, net bag Dbfl, garden-fruit bag Dt)r, ear bag SDe^r, ear of a needle *bag £){)«, a wine measure bag Del, oil bag 9>aar, pair, couple bag ?)e(^, pitch bag 55fanb, pawn, pledge bag |)fuhb, pound bag 5)urt, desk bag Quart, quart bog SRab, wheel bag Stec^t, right bog 3lei(^,' empire *bag SRetg, twig bog 9lieb, reed bog Stieg, ream bog !Rtff, reef bag SHo'^v, reed, cane bog fRo^, horse bog ©olj, salt bog ®^ac^, check, chess bog ®(^eit, log of wood bag ®(^iff, ship *bag ©C^ilb, sign-board bog ©c^ilf, rush, reed bog ©c^Iof, lock, castle bag ©d^molj, grease, lard bag el)r, Slab, SBeiS, ©tbilb, ©tScJ, Iljal, Zljiec, , 93ie0, 93olt, iffiott, gelt; and, next to that, for derivative nouns of a concrete meaning, like S8ab, SSilb, iButl), Satlj, 3ac^, Sap, glof, ©elb, ©ift, ©tab, .^aiUJt, .&eft, iol)n, ioo*, iidjt, aitart, ai?af, SRel)!, artert, 2fle(!, 3leid), SRijf, ©4i|f, ©(l)(pfi, ©cl)ma(}, ©ie(), ©tift, Xfjetl, SBac^rf, SBetjr, iZDevt, gtiig, gie(, (from baben, bilbcii, biegeii, bcctcii, filgsii, fapn, ftiepen, gcttcn, gc(>eii, grabcii, 1 Sarf 2Bilb))tet, venison, is a corruption of 2Bilbt)tateii, roasted game. 2 'iintWtt, answer, is feminine. 178 GEKMAN GRAMMAR. iiebtn, ()iitien, (ol^ncii, (oofen, (eud^teit, merten, mepii< marten, nlfttii, letc^en, taiifeii, fdjapii, fc^ttcf en, fdjiticljeii, Itcbeii, (tctfcii, tijeile"/ londjfen, iBCljreit, iuittcii, jeiigen, sie(ett) ; lastly, for ahsiracis with a meamng inclining towards the concrete^ as ©luct (from geliiigen), ictt (from Uiticil), etc. § 125. Substantives with the augment ®e= are neuter, with the following exceptions : — d) Mascvline. ter ®e'6raud^; use, usage ber ®eru{^, smell, odor bcr ®et)an!e/ thought ber ®efang/ song, singing t)er ©efatten, favor bet ©efc^tnad, taste *ber ®e^att, value, contents ber ®eflant, stench t>cr ®etap, space in a house ier ©ewinn, gain ber ®ertu^, enjoyment iier ®ett)innji, premium. J) Feminine. bte ©e'fceriic, gesture, bearing btc ®eniige, sufficiency bte ®e1Jiit)r, propriety tie ®ef(^t(^te, history, story t)ic ©eturt, birth bte ©efe^wutji, swelling bie ®ebulb, patience bie ®eflaU, shape bie ®efat)r, danger bie ®ewa|r, security, guaranty bie ©emeinbC/ community bie ®en>att, power. Of the above, all masculines are abstract nouns, inclining towards the expression, at the same time, of concrete notions ; the feminines also are all abstract nouns, at the same time denoting concrete notions. Of the neuters all iteratives and collectives formed from substantives express concrete notions, many mclining towards abstract meanings ; all others express abstract notions, inclining m usage towards concrete meanings. The names of persons are also excepted, their gender being determined by the meaning ; and likewise substantives ending in ung, |eit, tcit, fi^aft, fam (see § 127) ; as, ber ©efptete, bie ©efpielitt; playmate ; ber ®efa|rte, bie ®cfa|rttn, mate ; ber ®enDJ[e, bie ©enoffin, associate ; ber ®efcUe, help, fellow ; bie ®enefung, recovery; bie ®elegenl^eit, occasion ; bie ®ettitf[en^af= tlg!eit/ conscientiousness; bie ®emeinf(|aft, community; ber THEORETICAL PART. 179 ®eI)orfam, obedience. Exception, bag ®efd)l»t|ier, brother, sister. Note. — The number of substantives witli the augment @e is very large, and new ones, always neuter, may be formed from almost any verb. The above masculines, with the exception of , 2Btnii, SBiimfl, the last two now obsolete,) are formed directly, without terminations, from verbs with the Umlaut ; namely, from the Past or Past Participle of verbs of the on- cient form. No such forms occur among the feminines, which are all derived from the root of verbs (except ©ebutt and ©cfc!)lmil|{, derived from bie ©djloulfl and the antiquated fflurt), while in ©cf(!)ic!)te, ©eljutt, ©cf$U)iiI|l, &(' bttie, the t ((I, ie) does not belong to the root. The great majority of neuters, wheii derived from verbs, have no Umlaut at all, — like iai ©elmtfe, running, ©cftiige, singing, ©tmiicmcf, murmur, ©elacjl, laughter, — and aire formed simply by omission of the final n from the Infinitive ; or when derived from substan- tives, have in a great majority of cases the substantival Umlaut (vi from a^ 5 from C, u from It, nil from aii) where jt is possible, and with no suffixed terminations, with the exception of ©cfpiiinfl, spinning; ©efpeiiff, spectre; ©cdSutJC, from SSaubC/ building; ©ebvaube, brewing; ©elfibbe, vow, pledge; ©ettaibc, grain, from the ancient g 1 1 r d g i t> t , Participle Past of t c a g a n , to bear ; ©^mal^^, picture; ©cmndjt, work; ©tfdjaft, business. SaS ©efSff, for instance, is not derived from ftiiifetif but from itx ©off, drinking. Substantives op moke than ,one Syllable. § 126. Masculines are those ending in el, em," en, er, tttg/ ling, ig, ric^, [am. The terminations el, ert, er, however, are subject to the fol- lowing exceptions * : — 1. Feminine Exceptions in el. bie 2t(^fel, shoulder fcie IBre^el, bunn bie Slmpet, lamp bie ^\xmm.d, tassel bie Slmfel, blackbird bie Simtet, cymbal bie 3lngel, hook, hinge bie Slaufel, clause bie Sturifet, auricula bie 2)attel, date bie Si6ct, Bible bie £)eid)fel, carriage-pole * These lists contain many words of Latin and Greek origin, with slightly altered forms, but in most cases retaining the original gender; as, tie 5at)B(, the fable, /aftw/a; tie 3iife(, island, insula; Me Setcc, cedar, cedrus; iM SOluli' flcr, cathedral, monasterivm. 180 GERMAN GKAIIMAK. bieDiflcI, thistle *bie 5Kanget, mangle bie 5)rojyeI, thrush bie WliSpd, medlar t)ie (Sic^el, acorn bie SOJijiel, mistletoe bie ©piflel, epistle bie SJlorc^el, toadstool, moril bie %aM, /able bie fFJufi^el, shell, muscle bie gacfet, torch bie 5«e|[el, nettle bit %a[bil, flounce bie S^leflel, lace bie gejfel, fetter bie SfJabel, needle bie gicBel, spelling-book bie Stubel, vermicelli biegiebel, fiddle bie Drgel, organ bie giflel, fistula bie 95tppel, poplar bie glo^tet, flower of speech bie 3)ujler, scab, pustule bie gormet, formula bie 3)oraber, parable bie guc^tel, flat of the sword bie 9)rintef, primrose bie ®aljet, fork bie 9lanun!e(, ranunculus bie ®ei|et, scourge bie SRo^pet, rasp bie ®onbeI, gondola bie Sia^d, rattle bie ®urgel, throat bie SRegel, rule bie ^a^pel, reel bie Siunjel, wrinkle bie .^ec^el, hackle bie ©(^ac^tel, box bie pummel, humble-bee bie ©c^aufel, shovel bie Sttfetf island bie ©(^outet, swing bie Mad^d, saucer-tile bie ©djinbet, shingle bie Man^d, pulpit bie ©djiiffet, dish bie .Jlartoffct, potato bie ©emmet, roll of bread bie J?apfel, capsule bie ©id)el, sickle bie ^lingel, small bell bie ©pinbel, spindle bie .S'oppel, coupling, tie, leasli I bie ©taffcl, round of a ladder bie ,$lrami5el, carding instrumen) t bie ©tuppel, stubble bie ^ugel, ball, globe bie ©ttiegcl, currycomb bie ^uppel, cupola bie SLafef, table bie J?unfcl, distaflT bie SEarantel, tarantula bie Jturfccl, crank bie 3;robbet, tassel bie ^uttel, tripe bie SErommet, drum 'bie SJJanbet, almond bie Sviiffel, truflfle THEORETICAL PART. 181 bie SSettct, beldam bie 2Binbet, swaddling-cloth bie SBad)tet, quail bie SBurjet, root bie 2Baffe(, wafer, waffle bte QtDiibtl, onion, bie SBeifet, queen.-bee Also some provincial expressions, like ©ac^tet/ .Rettet, etc. 2. Neuter Exceptions in ct* bag Sfc^tel, the eighth part f bag Drafel, oracle bag Siinbel, bundle, bunch bag ©unfcl, darkness bag Syempel, example bag .Kapitet, chapter bag ^aBcf, cable *bag 5KanbcI, number of fifteenj bag ©iegel, seal bog Siiefet, purples bag Ueljet, evil bag gertet, young pig bag SBiefcI, weasel bag 5Wtttet, means bag SBigpd, a measure, bag ^'i\t\, pint bag JSenbel/ pendulum bag sRat^fel, riddle bag 3lubel, herd, flock bag ©i^armii^et, skirmish bag cr, eyelash tiic 3ifF^r/ cipher bie Sitter, guitar. J^OTE 1. In some of these substantives the tennination is not a enffiz, bnt an Auslaut belonging to the root; as in ^tlet, Sinner, ^eiit, SItaucc, iaiier, &^tttn, Xxawev, in old Bigh-Germanv ir a,, dura, federa, mura, lura, 8 c i u r a , etc. And the presumption is, that most, if not all, of them ended originally in «, and are on this account feminine. KoTE 2. The names of rivers in er and et are also feminine. See § 121. 4. 4. Neuter bag 3lBentcuer, adventure baS Sitter, age bag SBauer, bird-cage *ba3 ©otter, yolk bag Siter, pus bag Suter, udder bag gftt^er, window ba3 Sleter, fever bag geuer, fire bos guber, load bag Sutter, food, fodder bag grauenjimmer, female bag ©attev, gate, grate bag ®itter, gate, grate bag ^lojler, cloister bag hotter, collar, bib Exceptions in er, bag ^uj)fer, copper bflg Soger, layer, camp, couch bog Sajtev, vice bog Seber, leather bog Subcr, carrion bog fWeffev, knife bag SJIiebev, bodice bog SOtuflcr, pattern bog Dpfer, sacrifice bag ^flajier, pavement, plaster bog 33oI|ier, cushion, bolster bag 5>ur»er, powder bog Sflegifler, register, index, list bog Stuber, oar, rudder bog ©iI6er, silver bog QucdfitlJer, quicksilver THEORETICAL PART. 183 *t>a3 (Stcuer, helm ba« ffietter, weather bag Z^iatn, theatre baa SBunber, wonder bos Ufer, shore bag Bimmcr, room bag Unge^euer/ monster bag Bcfter/ sceptre, bag SCaffer, water 6. Neuter Exceptions in ett. bag Sllmofen, alms bag Saten, bed-linen bag 33ecten, basin bag Sc^en, fief bag Sifctt, iron bag Ceinen, hnen bag giiffctt, colt bag SCappen, coat of arms bag ©etoiffett; conscience bag ^tii^tn, token, bag .Stiffen, cushion Also some hfiniiiver Substantives, like ^(^a* iJBoljipcgeljfii, the well-doing, ^as SBetgeljeii, mis- demeanor, 6a«( !8etl)cec^cn, crime, ^asr SStatcn, roast meat; bet SSroctcn, morsel, crumb; ber (StfoSen, favor; bcr (Scaben, ditch; bcr f)u^t«, cough; bet JJlu^cii, use, profit; bet (S(t)«bcn, injury; bet ©djatten, shadow, shade; bet (BcS)luc()jeit, hiccup ; bet ©c^mUJfeii, cold in the head ; bet Xtopfcit, drop ; bet gapfeiT, spigot. SaS ®tatcii means, the roasting; bdrf .£>ii(leii, the coughing; and so on. Note. — Of the substantives oontajned in the above five lists, very few are abstracts with a leaning towards concrete meanings; 91ege(, S;;empcl/^apite(, gulieO abeiitciiet, SItartet, giebct, 0\>fn, '■Jdmofeii, being foreign words, in which the termination belongs to the foreign stem ; ttetiet and Siittel are the neuters of adjectives substantively used. § 127. Feminines are those ending in e, ttng, !§eit, leit, fd^aft, enb, in, ci, 1. Masculine Exceptions in c. a) ber ^afc, cheese ber iJriebe, peace ber 33uc^jiabe, letter of the alphabet ber guntc, spark 184 GERMAN GRAMMAR. ier ©cbanfc, thought ber ®Iau6e, belief, faith ber ^an^t, heap bcr SRante, name h) Also a number of names of persons and male animals ; as, ber ©ante, seed ber (S^abe; damage beriEBtHe, will. ber SSarbe, bard ber SSote, messenger ber SSttte, knave ber 33urge, security ber SSurfc^e, fellow ber (ix1>i, heir ber ®i)^e, idol ber ^eibe, heathen ber ■§irt(e), herdsman ber 3nf<*fr«; inhabitant, lodger ber 3ube, Jew ber Rnabt, boy ber ^unbc, customer ber Sajfe, fop ber 5'leffe, nephew ber 5)at^e, godfather "ber Sliefe, giant ber ©c^enfe, cupbearer ber ©(^it^e, sharp-shooter ber ©fla»e, slave ber .&e(fc, Hessian ber ®ric(|e, Greek ber 9)ortttgiefe, Portuguese ber 5^reu§e, Prussian ber ©(^wafie, Swabian ber ©ac^fe, Saxon - ber aCejlp'^ate, "Westphalian ber S^artare, Tartar ber Siirle, Turk ber ^ole, Pole ber SKufe, Russian ber Sette, Lettian ber ©amojebe, Samoyed ber Sranfe, Franconian ber 3tffe, ape, monkey ber S3ut(e, bull ber ®ra^c, di-agon ber %aitt, falcon ber g<*rre (antiq.), bullock ber J&afc, hare ber SiJwe, lion ber Dc^fe, ox ber SlaBe, raven ber Stcippe, black horse. Also some with the augment ®e, as ®efa|rte, ©efeUe, ®enoffe, ®efpiele, and a number of patronyaiics. 2. Neuter exceptions in e are bag Sluge, eye, baS Snbe, end, *bag @r'6e, inheritance, ba« S3ett(e), bed, bag ^emb(e), shirt. 3. Exceptions in ung, fi^oft, enb, are ber ^ornung, February, bag 55ctfc^oft, seal, ber 9l6ettb, evening, bag Du^enb, dozen, ba^ ®Iettb, misery, bag SLaufenb, thousand, bag 3a^r3c:^enb, decade, ten years. THEOEETICAL PART. 185 Note. — The terminations ttti) (lit) and art) (at) occur only in the following originally German words: iu ^vmiitl), poverty, Me ^timatt), home, He .^ciratl), marriage, 6ie or t>ev gicratl), ornament. For foreign words in ut an4 at, see 5 130. § 128. Neutebs are those ending in c^ett, leirt, fat, fet, ni^, 1. Exceptions in nif . bie Sebrattgnif , distress bie (Srfparttt^, savings fete Sefugnip, authority tie goulnif, putrefaction bie Setiimtnernif, sorrowful- bie ginflerntf, darkness ness bie .Scnntnif , knowledge bie SSefovgnig, apprehension bie %xadm^, drought bie Setmfenif, affliction bie SSerbammtti^, damnation bie SSewanbtnif, conjuncture bie SSerbcrtnif, corruption (al- bie Smpffingni^, conception so neuter) *bte Srfcnntnif , cognition, bie SSerfaumntf and ©iiumni^/ judgment neglect, omission bie (Sriau'bnif / permission . bie SBitbnip, wUdemess. Note. — The great majority of those in ni^ are neuter, and have, like batf ©ebat^tiiif:, memory, iaS SSebucfnif, want, taS SSuiiiJnip, alliance, Sae( gcugnif, testimony, toarf '•ifcrgernip, scandal, etc., a more decided leaning towards con- crete notions than the above feminihes in mf. Thus bie ffrtcniitni^, cognition, intellect, leans more to an abstract notion than ba^ Srt'ciiiitnif, judgment. Still, with the exception of SSulnifi, Stlaubnifi, SSevbammiiip, plurals may be formed from all feminines ; and without exception from all neuters in iiiff. 2. Mcceptions in \al and fel. bie ©rangfol, distress bcF Sfel, ass, donkey bie SJtii^fat, pain, tirouble ber ©tiSpfel, cork, stopper. bie Zxixb^ai, affliction Also all in fel under § 126. 1, not formed by the suffix fet, hut where the termination belongs to the stem. 3. Exceptionsjn t^unt and x&jt ber 3rct'^um, error ber ^(Ai&jt, hawk ber Steic^t^uttt, riches ber ^t^xid^t, sweepings. 16* 186 GERMAN GEAMMAR. § 129. To the rule, under § 122. 9, that aU compound sul- stantives follow the gender of their last component, the following seven, compounded with t)cr SRuf^, courage, are exceptions : — bie ^nmuf^, grace bie ©anftmut^, meekness tie ©emut|, humility tie ©(^wermut^, melancholy "Dk ©ropiflut^, generosity tie 2Be|mutl§, melancholy, re- i>ie £angmut|/ forbearance gret. § 130. Gender of Foreign Substantives. Foreign substantives keep, as a rule, their original gender ; as, bie 3nfet (from Lat. insida), bag ^lofier (Lat. claustrum), iai SWiinjier (Lat. manasterium), ber ^erfer, prison (Lat. car- eer). Hence all substantives in arte, ane, ine (Fr. ane, aine, ene), te (Lat. ia), ion (Lat. io), tat (Lat. tas), i! (Lat. ica), enj (Lat. entia), ina (Lat. ina, Fr. ine), iffe (Lat. issa, Fr. esse), obe (Lat. odus), one (Fr. one), iine (Fr. une), ut (Lat. ura), are feminines ; all in tnent (Lat. mentom) and ma or ni (Lat. ma) are neuters, except ber 9)loment ; aU in tgmug, at, an, ant, at, ct, cnt, tn, ifl, it, ter, at, log;, or or eur, and it (Lat. icus), and similar names of males, are masculines ; while all in icr, not names of males, are neuter ; as, baa 5)a)5ier, SKappier, fftesicr, ©charmer, Slurnier ; except bie SiJlanicr {la maniere). Examples. — !&ie Qtttmant (a kind of sofa), bit Snigtiine, bie SRitiiie (ruin, of a building), bie ^JljilofocHe, bie gtittion, btc ?piet«t, bie Xcdpiiif, bie Sabcnj, bie ailelijfe, {and so tlie German ^otniffe, hornet,) bie 5)evii>be, bie ^ont, bic SRelone, bie gcttuiie, bie Stcfiir, Sftatiit; ber (2nt!;ii(ta^muS, ber ©ataii, aSeteraii, ber Sanbibat, ber hornet, ber SBattSant, g(c)j()aiit (Stamniit), ber ^SrSftbent, (ber ^amiii), ber (piiigiiiii, ber iiiiguijl, ber Sefiiit, ber jfaiionier, ber ^arbiiial, ber Xdcolcg, ber SdtWr, ber Soufleiir; ba« glemciit, ba# 9")'f3"«»» *»'' '■^xiimo., ba^ Spmptom, ine Spfiem. Exceptions.— Sxi^i Q^im, (batf 9>oricttan,) ba* er 3!Bei|e, kite - iie SHJci^c, consecration. Note. — The following compounds with Iljcil are masculines : ^tt 'SettijiH, advantage ; in OladjtljeiC, disadvantage ; iet 'ilati)eii, share, interest. The following are neuters : iai ©cgeiitljeil, the contrary, reverse ; pii Uvri)ci(, judg- ment, sentence; iai (itbti}eH, hereditary portion; iai SB(irt{ttl)eil/ fore part; t*S .^iittertljeil/ hind part; ta* ®toftljeil; — the latter three occurring also as masculiues. Declension or Substantives. § 182. There are in German two declensions, the ancient and the modem, formed by addition of the following termina- tions to the substantive^ AsciENT Declension. MODEBN DECLEf Singular* Wominaiive, — — e or — Genitive, — ti or g — Ctt or n Dative, — e or — — en or n Accusative, Plwal — en or n Nominative, — e or — — en or n Genitive, — e or — — en or n Dative, — ett or n — en or n Accusative, — e or — — en or n § 133. In addition to the above terminations, words belonging to the ancient declension assume the Umlaut in the Plural (a, ft; 0, fi; U, ii; flu, flu), with a few exceptions (see § 143) ; 190 GERMAN GBAMMAK. those belonging to the modem declension never do. Words' having no 0, 0, U, au, can take no Umlaut. § 134. The ancient declension comprises the great bulk of masculine and neuter, with but a limited number of feminine substantives ; the modern declension, comprises the great bulk of feminine, with but a limited number of masculine substan- tives. § 135. No feminines of either declension have any termina- tions in the singular. § 136. The laws of euphony direct when the e of the termi- nations in both declensions is to be omitted ; namely, in the modem declension, in all words terminating in the nominative in e, el, er, and in the ancient declension, in all words whose root-stem has assumed one of the terminations cl, en, or cr, and therefore consists of more than one syllable, while in monosyl- labic words, or monosyllables compounded with prefixes, the e must be retained. Note. — This peculiarity of the language, ■which makes the declensions, otherwise simple and logical, complicated and difficult, is to be accounted for by the fact that the German does not like the rhythmical or metrical form of tte Daclylus (- -' ", one long or accented syllable followed by two short or unaccented ones), but decidedly prefers the Trochceiis {- ^ , one accented syl- lable followed by one short or unaccented one), and next to it the Spandeus (-i _, one accented and one half-accented syllable) and the Bacchius ( — — , one accented, followed by a weakly or half accented and an aecentless syllable). This is the reason why be* ©ol)n(«, 6c# ^aitfe*, beat ©oljiie, iem ^aiife are approved, and itg 'Suttxtg, bent 9)acere, iti Sifeiie*, bem (cifene are intolerable; but iti gtetcl)tl}iime£i, bem 91ci(^tl;ume, and id £lieic!)t(;iim*, bent gtcid;tl)iim, are equally often used. § 137. A small nunjber of masculines, and about one half of the monosyllabic neuters, and aU with the suffix t^um, form the plural in er instead of c, for the sake of euphony. § 138. A small number (six) of monosyllabic neuters (§ 152), and a number of monosyllabic masculines (§ 151), form tlie plural after the modem declension. § 139. The different principles upon which the German de- THEORETICAL PART. 191 clension is moulded modifying each, other so much, it is of importance to have pointed out those rules in the formation of the declensions which never suffer an exception. They are the following : — 1. All Datives plural (even of the articles, pronouns, and adjectives) end in n. 2. All Accusatives plural, and all Accusatives singular of the ancient declension and of feminines, are like their Nomina- tives. 3. All feminines have in the singular four like cases. 4. All masculines in the modern declension have ett or n in aU cases except the Nominative of the singular. § 140. Paradigms of the Ancient Declension. I. Monosyllabic Substantives. MascuHn^. Feminine,. Ntvier. 1. The son. 2 1. The hand. 3. The word. Sing. Nam. i)cr ©o'^n bie ^anb ba« SBort Gen. i)cS ®ot)nei3 ber ^anb be3 2Borte3 Dot. bent ©o'^ne ber ^anb bent SBorte Ace. ben ®o^tt, bie ^anb, bag 3Bort, Plur. Nom. bie ©o^tte bie .&anbe bie SBorte Gen. ber ®o|nc ber ^iinbe ber SCorte Dot. ben @o|ncrt ben ^Snben ben aBortcn Ace. bie ©o^nc. bie §onbc. bie SSorte. Masculine, Neuter. 4. The man. 5. The book. Sing. , N. ber.SJZann bag aSuc^ G. bes mo.v.v.ti beS Suites D. bent ?!Kanne bent Su^e A. ben 3JJanrt, bag aSuc^, Plur. N. bie SJldnner bie SSiic^er G. ber Sltdnner ber 33u^er D. ben SJlannern ben Sitc^ern A. bie W. ben ^dfen A. bie ^afe. Neuter. Neuter. 10. The mountain chain. 11. The weight, bag ©ebirge bag (Bmid)t beg ©eBirgcg bent ®e6irge bag ©eBirge, bie ©etirge ber ©efcirge ben ©ebirgen bie ©efcirge. beg ®ewic§teg bent ®et»i(^te bag ®etti(|t, bie ®e»i(|te ber ©ewid^te ben ©ensic^ten bie ©etoic^te. § 141. Paradigm of the Modern Declension. Masculine. 12. The boy, knave. Sing. Jf. ber 58tt6e G. beg SSuBen JD. bem SSuben A. ben SSuben, Pltjr. JV. bie SBulJen G. ber 33uBen D. ben Sttfien A. bie SSuBen. 13. The wife, bie Srau ber grau ber grau bie Orau, bie grauen ber grauen ben grauen bie grauen. Feminine. 14. The niece, bie S^iid^te ber 3'lic|te ber ^lii^te bie Wc^te, bte giid^tcn ber Sflic^tert ben Wc^ten bie S^lid^ten. THEORETICAL PART. 193 Feminine, 15. The sister. Sing. 17'. tie aud)e bie -jiiifc bie •Jiiiibe bie ^naHc btc Sortc bie ^tal^ne bie lad^fe bet HI)o(c^/ salamander,' bet SHonb, moon, ber aRotb, murder, bet Stt, place, bet 95i pulse, ber 95iiiitt/ point, bet SRiif, call, bet ©djitft, rascal, Plural. bie Stolclje btc aitoiibe t bie SRotbc bie Srte t bie 9)arte bie ^f«be bie 9)piiie X bie 9)»(c bie 9)iilfe bie 9)u>itte bie giiifc § bie Scjpiifte ber @cl;ltlcS, dram, draught, bie SdplufCc bet ®t!)«l), shoe, bie Scijiilje bet ©tiKir, starling, bie ©taate *er ©tojf, stuff, material, bie Stcfe bet Suitb, sound, strait, bie ©iiube bet Xag, day, bie Xagc bet latt, tact, measure, bie Xfttte ber Iljton, throne, bie lljronc bet SSetfiic^, trial, attempt, bie Sierfud^e bcr gott, inch, bie gotte.t § 144. According to the second paradigm, fete J^ant), are in- flected the following feminine monosyllables, all of them taking the Umlaut. Plural. bie •^ciigffc bie '■JfiisrfiScljte bie 'iitfU bie SSSiitc bie SBtttiite bie SStullc bie gniijie bie ?tii3fl/ anguish, bie 'a\xefi.i\i)t, evasion, bie 'iiift, axe, bie SSdiit, bench, bie SStaiit, bride, bie Srufl, breast, bie Satifi, fist, Plv,ri)nmixi)t, swoon, is £>\)nmai)ttn, amd of SSolImac^t, power of attorney, Scamadptcn. t 35et 2Bic!)t, wight, forms the plural S!BicI)te. % See § 154. 196 GERMAN GRAMMAR. _-^ Singular. ba^ Sad>, roof, ^A^ ^du^, deuce, ace {at cards), i(XS Sotf, village, *as (f i, egg, featf SftC^, compartment, ^ne gap. Tat, cask, 'Odi S5sl6, field, iai* ®c(b, money, ba* ©(as, glass, baS ©lieb, limb, t>as ©ml), grave, bttrf ©rarf/ grass, iAi ©lit, estate, boon, biis^ -^aiipt, head, {las' ^ati^, house, baS •&!)[}/ wood, bttS -jKirii, horn, ba* -&ii!)ii, fowl, 6aS ^all), calf, ba* ^inb, child, barf ^'(eib, garment, bus ^orn, grain, in ^rttut, herb. Plural. Singular. Plural- bte SStjjct barf iamm, lamb, * bie iaramct bie Saufet iAi iniib, land, country, bte ianbet ba«r iidjt, light, bit tidjter bie Sotfec barf iicb, song, bic ticbcc bie Crier in^ lt>6}, hole, bie ii(l)fc bie giiefeet barf ©afJmaI)l, dinner,* bie ©aflmnljfet bie S'° lt«t barf Scntmal, monument, bie Sciifmaler bie gelber barf SHaiil, mouth, bie OTaiiler bie ©elber barf 3l?ciif(J, wench, bie SDeiiftljet bie ©liifet barf 3le|J, nest, bie Oleffec bie ©liebec barf ^Jfiinb, pawn, bie ^^fSiibcc bie ©tabcr barf SRab, wheel, , bie Dlabet bie ©tafcc barf SRcirf, twig, bie SKcifce bie ©utec barf CRinb, neat cattle, bie £Riiiber bie -poiipter barf ©dpilb, sign-board, bie ©(jiilbcc bie -Saufcc iii ©(^(of, lock, castle, bie ©(ttolfcr bie -pSIjec ttti ©ttrteert, sword, bie ©djloertet bic -gSriier barf ©tift, eccles. found., bie ©tiftcc bie .&ul)tiec barf Xljat, valley, bie Xljatert bie ^olbct barf Xiic^, cloth, bic Xud^ec bie .Siiibet iai SBolt, nation, bic 53S(tct bie jjleibev barf !S5aminrf, jacket, bie iffiiiinfer bie .R5tnec barf SBeib, wife, bie SBcibcc bie ^tauter barf 2Bott, word, bie iJBovtct.t 2. Further, the following six, with the augment ®e : Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. barf ©cmadp, apartment, bie ©cinacljec barf ©ejidjt, face, bie ©ejicljtct t'O.i ©cinutl), mind, bie ©cmutljtc barf ©cfpciiil, spectre, bic ©efpeiijlec barf ©efc^lcc^t, sex, gen- bic ©eftljletjitct barf @eit>aiib, garment, bie ©eieaiibet. eration, 3. Further, all substantives with the suffix tl)unt ; as, Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. barf 3S>'ilcnt')ii»>> bet 3tttl)um, bic guvffeiitljllmer bie 3tttl)umct bee Sfteic^tljum, bie CReidjtliumci;, Note. — There is no abstract noun among the above words, except 2tmt, SSob, -©lit/ ©tift, all with a decided leaning towards concrete notions. On the con- * Other compounds of 3)!a( and SItaljt, and these words themselves, have aHale and 3llal)le. t X()ale for XljaUr is a provincialism. Goethe has once, bie XOalc bttttn>fcit, bie ^S(;eii glulin, the valleys are steaming, the hills glowing. t See § 154. THEORETICAL PART. 197 trary they almost all belong to that class of concrete nonns which are most ia use in daily life, and therefore most liable to assume this euphonic r, which indeed greatly relieves the hard pronounoiation of the final t, and appears almost spontaneously, f'or this reason sevwal German dialects have a great many other monosyllabic masculines and feminines- ending in et in the plural, which the written language has not always sanctioned; as, S)Sd)tei:, wicks, for S!)«t(;te ; S>Srnei:, thorns, for 2>oi:iie. Kames of materials do not like the termi- nation in et, as implying a strictly concrete notion; or when they assume it, as in ©rSfetj -flSljet/ they express distmct individuality. Thus the lan- guage found a means of expressing different meanings by different forms of the plural; as, iffiovte, words connected in sentences, S5>6tter, unconnected words ; S>0i'nejv thorns as a whole, S5rner, thorns taken singly; (Sefi^tt, visions, ©cjidjtet, faces; iite SStiibec !)ie f)ammfc ber SSobeii, bottom, floor, Me SSSbeit Uar. ter %iet, acre, in S8ni6er, brother, ber .^ainmeV/ hammer, Plural. tetSt^WageVjbr.-in-law, bie ©c^lBagec ber ijaben, thread, t>tt ®atteii, garden, ber (Btabeit, ditch, bef .Sragen, collar, ber .^afeii, harbor, ber 'iiffei, apple, ber ■pammef, wether, ber ^cmlil, commerce, aflftiir, quarrel, bet a)laiitel, cloak, bie Sabeit bie ®rtrteii bie Srabeit bie ^cagen bie fiafm bie 2(et)feC bie .Jammct bie |)ttiibe(, quarrels, bie aUttiitel bet SSater, father, bet 95«c^ter, farmer, bet ^ajlen, chest, box, bet iAitw, shop, bet aRageit, stomach, ber i)fcii< stove, oven, bet @c!)abeit, damage, ber 9labc(, navel, bev Stagel, nail, bet ©attel, saddle, ber ©cljiialjet, beak, bet aSogel, bird. bie 9)Stct bie 9)ad)ter. bie .Kaffeit bie l^beit bie SRagen bie iJefeit bie @c^abeit. bie Kabel bie aiiiget bie ©attet bie ©cljnnbet bie aSSget. 2. Neuters. Only bad Jt(of?et, pi. bie iSl5(let ; ba* ^^a^n, the plaster, bie ^flaffet ; and ba* g^tiftet, (in the meaning of medicinal powder, bie 9)tt(Sct, and) bie 9)filbcc ; bad SBapr, bie SSJSffet and bie S!B(i|Ter. 17* 198 GERMAN GRAMMAE. § 148. According to the eighth, ninth, tenth, or ^eleventh paradigm are declined all masculines and neuters of more than one radical syllable not terminating in er; et; cn, (^ett/ and lettt; chiefly those with the suffixes ig, ing, ic^t, rid§, ling, fam, fal, (eighth,) and those with the augment ®e= terminating in none of the feminine suffixes (fc^aft, f^iit, hti, ung, in), but in e (tenth) or the simple Auslaut (eleventh), when not naturally males (§ 149). According to ^afe no other word is declined. . But only the following have the Umlaut, viz. : SOtfltfc^olI/ SJlarfc^aDe ; ^ergog, ^erjoge, duke ; SBifi^off, bishop ; a few foreign words (see § 165) ; and of those with the augment ®e»/ the masculines ®e6rflud§, ®crud^, ®efang, ®efc§ma(f, ®e|lant, ®enu5. § 149. According to the twelfth paradigm, istx 33u6e, and always without Umlaut, are inflected all masculines in e (a ' complete list of them is given under § 127. J), and also the following : — 1. A number of such as originally terminated in t, but have now thrown off this termination, viz. : — %n 58 ar, bear. all other casps, SSarcrt ier S'^rifl, Christian, a « e^rtflett ber 5inf(e), finch, ti cc gtnJen tier %vix% priiice. a C£ giirflett "tin ®ecE, fop, u U ®ecfcrt ber ®raf, count, a (( ©rafett ier .^eli), hero, a £C ^tVom ber §err, master, sir. a (( ^errett tier ^amerab, comi-ade, u t( ^amna'om ier $irt(e), herdsman, » U '§irten ber Scu, lion. ti u Scuen ber Sl^enfi^, man, (ft ti SJJmfd^cu fcer SJJo^r, moor. u " Sl'lo^rert ier ?larr, fool. u ti Starren i)er S^lerB, nerve. u ti SfletDctt • bcr D(^«(e), ox, u u Deafen THEOEElICAL PAKT. 199 bet 55rtnj, prince, all other cases, ^^^irtSC" bev St)or, fool, . « " 2[)orert bet faii, peacock, 6er 1Stcati(J, ostrioh, Jift 9114 (Me gtifte), crack, Set Itiitcrtljait, subject, in Ste, lake, bet SSettet, cousin, bet ©pocit, spur, Set gicrtatt;, ornament, tcr Swat, state, in gin*, interest. 6cr ©tadjel, sting, Also all foreign words denoting males ending in et; as, Zeitit. § 152. According to the eighteenth paradigm, baS Stuge, are inflected bag S3ett(e), bed; iaS Enbe, end; boS ^emb(c), shirt; iai C^r, ear ; iai Seib, woe, suflTering. § 153. According to the twentieth paradigm, ber Sflame, are inflected the following masculines in e or en (both terminations being in use): — in SSiicdflabc, letter of the alphabet, in -fiBiifit, heap, in Saiiin (or Saumen), thumb, in 9tame, name, ier Sel* (or gdfeii), rock, ' Sec ©c^merj, pain, ter ^unte, spark, >ec ©cjjcect (or Scftrecfeit), fright, >et iStieftc, peace, in @ame, seed, bee ©ebantc, thought, ber ©djabc, injury, bee ©laitbe, faith, "belief, in SBiBe, will. Note. — The in-egu1arity in this paradigm consists merely in the nominative of the singular being sometijnes used in the shortened form ; in all other respects they are inflected according to the sixth paradigm. Here belong also the nouns ber 9lovb(cit), North, ber ©(i(en), East, ber ©5b(en), South, bet 2Befl(cii), West, and their compounds, as 3lorbo(}(en), etc. These' take eiiS in the Geni- tive, en in the Dative and Accusative, and, with the exception of SBefl (bic SBejle, the zephyrs) form no plural. Still with prepositions may be found, Mn EUptb nac^ ©fib, gen 0(l imb iS5e|1 (rather poetical). According to .^erj, no other word is inflected, and according to SJJutter, only bte SEoc^ter. Notes to the Paradigms. Note 1. Secondary derivative substantives formed by the suffixes tng, ling, tljiim, nip (neuters), ic^t, require, because these suffixes have a secondary accent, the termination e (those in tijum, cc) in the Plural, and erf, e in the Genitive and Dative singular; as, be* ^iiiigliii'gerf, bcin Jung'lin'ge, bie JSnglinge; be* £l)vi'< ftttti}n'meg, bcm (El)ri'(fcntl)u'me ; beii .^c'tiii'gerf, betn .^c'tiii'ge, bie .^etiugc; bcrf @lcitl;'iii'|lfe*, bem Steit^ni'iye, bit ©leicljnifl'e ; iH J)n'()ic!)'tes, bem .&«'(>i(l)'te, bie ^aljtdj'te. This e may be omitted in the Genitive, but should not be in the Dative, and is never omitted in the Plural. But it is positively intolera^^ in THEOEETICAL PART. 201 the Genitive and Dative singular of words in ig; as, ieg ^5iit()#, iem ^Siiig, be* ^oiiigS, itm ^iiiiig, although Schiller has, ba« muff id) bem ^ 5 it i 3 e geOcn. NoiE 2. In many monosyllabic masculine and neuter words the e of the Genitive and Dative of the singular is likewise omitted, not only in poetry, but in every-day talis;. The pupil should not follow this bad practice. But even in poetry it cannot be omitted after the Unguals and dentals 6, t, tlj, f, *, fi, ff, ff/ ii 6< and should be omitted only after the liquids 1, m, 11, r. In proverbial sayings a greater liberty is allowed; as, mit giig(e) imb Slcc()t(c), with perfect right; Mn Ott(e) ju £>ct(c), from place to place ; in 2Ba(b tinb getb, in forests and fields; etiie tt()t 6011 ®clb, a gold watch; eiii {)tte, places.* bie ©an, sow, bie @ie Sttaii(?e, ostriches. battle, ostrich, bit ©ttou^e, battles, Me ©traufen, ostriches, ba* ©tfict, piece, bie ©tuctc, pieces, bie ©tiicf cii, fragments, bas 25titt, word, bie SBSrtcv, single words, bie SBotte, coherent words, bet golt, inch, toll, bie gStte, tolls, duties, bie goltc, inches. Snch as have already a double gender in the singular (\ 131) form of course different plurals, according to their genders ; as, bie SSattecn, peasants, bie SSaiier, cages; bie SStiiCel, humps, bie SSiiifeln, bosses; bie a3unbe, iSunbtiiffe, alliances, bie SSiinbe, bunches; bie ieitet, conductors, bie teitetii, ladders; bie Q5e(ol)mtiigen, rewards, bie ioljne, wages ; bie Stiftct, foundations, bie ©tifte, pe^; bie ©t!)t(be, shields, bie ©cipilbet, sign-boards f bie Iljcreii, fools, bie K)(itc, gates; bie 2l?ciifc^eii, men, bie SUeiifdjec, wenches; bie Seljmc, uncles, bie f)()me, awms. But the same plural obtains in bie .^eibcii, heathens, and bie .pcibcii, heaths; bie ^iefcrti, jaws, bie ^iefecii, pines; bie ©ptpffeii, sprouts, bie ©ptopii, rounds of a ladder; bie Xljeile, parts, bie aiitljeite, Iljeife, shares. Note. — Stanit also has, in compound words, the Plural leiKe (people; men) when used in a collective sense : as, 'itrbeit^maiiit, '^rbeit^leute, working people; Sctgmanii, miner; gotflmaim, forester; Stiljtmnnit, teamster; ffbctmanii, nobleman; {)anbeUmanii, trader, pedler; ^aiifmaun, merchant; iaiib^mann, countryman; 2)1ietl)ijmann, lodger; pimmecmanii/ carpenter; which have S8ctg« tciite, gorjlleiite, Siil)rleiite, etc. But others of this description have the regular plural, implying a moral praise ; as, SSiebecmiinncr, honest men; Sljcenmannec, men of honor; ©taatSmSmier, statesmen; and SljemSiinct, husbands, as dis- tinguished from (rljelcHte, husbands and wives. Declension of Foreign Substantives. § 155. Beside the rule given for the declension of foreign substantives in § 149. 8 and § 151, the following rules obtain. 1. Most names of persons and things of the masculine and neuter gender, not comprised in the above lists, follow the ancient declension and first paradigm, with e in the Plural, and ti or i, e in the Genitive and Dative Singular (the e omitted, as a rule, only after the liquids I, nt, n, r) ; as, ber S^or, t)e3 ei;or«, bcirt e^ore, fete E^ore; ber 3nfiinlt, bes 3nflinfte3, bie 3nflin!te ; ba« 2)?onumcnt, be^ SJlonumentes, We 2)?onumente ; bag ©tabcm, bes !Diabem3, bie S)iabeme ; bag Siurnier, bes 3;urmer3, bie SEurniere ; ber SEopag, bie Slcpafe ; ber Uta«, bie Utafe ; ber (Saptjir, beg ©aptjirg, bie ©ajjl^ire ; ber 9Jleteov, beg 9Jf eteorg, bie SJleteore. THEOEETICAL PART. 203 The following assume the Umlaut : ber 9l6t, SteBte ; i>er Stftar, Slltare ; ber Sifi^of, bie Sifc^ofe ; ber S^or, bie S^iirc ; ber S:^o= rat, ble S()oraIe ; ber ^anal, bte Nanette ; ber Kaplan, bie ^apliine ; ber 3Korafl, bie fWorajic, fen; ber 9)atajl, bie 9)alaj^c; ber 5)at)jl, bie ^a^jflc, pope ; ber ^^rotfl/ bie ^roBjie, provost. The Umlaut and the whole form prove that these words are more completely Germanized. The following, however, form the Plural in er ! ba3 .S)03)5ital and bflS ©pitat, bie J^iofpitaler, ©pitalcr ; bas Stcgiment, bie SRe^ gimenter; bag ^'ortal, bie ^nxtah and ^ortaler; bag .Kapitat (capital of a column), bie .ffapitdter, but bag .Capital, bie .Sapitale, capitals ; bag .Samifot, jacket, bie ■Kamifoter. ©enerat has ®e== nerale or ®enerale ; .i^arbinat, .Sarbinale or tSarbinale. 2. Those names of male persons ending in aner, ener, itter/ oner, euner, and most in er, as Dominitaner, 3taliener, 9ltt}encr, SBenebittlner, £)ragoncr, 3'Seuner, SJtagijier, follow the sixth paradigm, but without Umlaut. 3. After the mixed declension and seventeenth paradigm are declined, besides those in or, those in titt (Latin tivum) ; as, bflg 2lbjefti», beg Slbjettitig, bie 3lbjetti»en. But SZotitt, SRegitatiS), 55otniti9, form the plural in e. After the twenty-first paradigm are declined the neuters in turn, al, it (Lat. ium, ale, He), plural ten; as, bag ©tubiunt, beg ©tubiumg, bie ©tubicn; bag S»an= getium, gospel, beg ffittangeliumg, bte (Sttangclien; bag Slbttert^ (ium), beg ^boerfcg, bie 31b»er6ien ; bag 9)arti3ip(ium), beg ^avtl" jipg, bie 9)arti3ipicn ; bag Ma\>itah beg .^a)5italg, bie Jta)3itoliert (and .Stapitate) ; bag f^ofril, beg ^offtlg, bie gofftlien ; and, occurring only in the plural, ble Surialieit, bie gormalien, bie 9iaturalien, bie SfJloHtien. Likeivise bag Sttbisibuum, beg 3n= bioibuumg, bie 3ni'it>it'Ufn> Ailer the seventeenth paradigm are declined the following masculines : Diamant, Safan, pheasant, 3utBet, jewel, Sapaun, capon, Smpofl, tax, Sonfut, SKugM, 5)antoffeI, ^Jrafcft, ^^faltn, fRuhin, Srattat, and all in gm and . tgmug ; as, ©op^igm and ©op^igmug. Gen. beg ©op'^igmg and ©op|igmug', pi' bie ©op^igmen. After the eighteenth, the fol- 204 GERMAN GEAMMAE. lowing neuters : bag 3nfelt, ^xonom, ©tatut, 33crt, %aS ^xii' ma, bag panorama, f^anta^ma, SDogma. But ^lima has in the Plural Climate. 4. According to the modem feminine declension are declined all feminines ; as, 2:in!tur, Slatur; 3ote, SSafe, basis ; ^aMtat, Stajejiat. But the Greek words in is have en added in the plural, instead ; as, Saft^, Plur. S3afen ; S^cftS, SE:^efen. 5. A few Latin names have retained the Latin declension ; as, ber Safug, be3 Sofus, We SafuS, bie SWobi. 6. A few English and French words form the plural in g ; as, btc aJteetingg, bie Sourtg, bie ©rceig, bic SSottomg, bte gonb^, bie OenieS, bie Sorb^, bie dirt. bet XabeC, •reproach, bet XaufcD, exchange, bie '■JCusfaiifdjitngcit, bet lob, death. bie XobcrffSne, deaths. bet Xvoff, consolation. bie XtSfltiiigen, idi Unted^t-, wrong. bie Itiigetcdjtigteitcit, bus; lliigliKe, misfortune, bic ttiiglSterffaac, bet Uiitetticljt, instruction. bie Uiitctloeifmigen, bet lIvLittb, furlough. bie SSctitlaubmigen, bet 93etbac^t, suspicion. bet 23etbien|T, earnings, bet SBevjlaiib, understanding, bet SSerbtut', vexation, bic 9Sctbticplitl)tcitcit, barf ffietgiuigeit, pleasure, bic Sctgnugiingcn, amusements, bie <8ot(tc!)t, precaution, bic a3ot(ic!)tSmaptcgelii, bie SBotfotgc, provision, bet 2Bal)ii, illusion, 18 ' 206 GPRMAN GBAMMAE. Singular. Plural, ^cr SBift, wit, smartness, Mc 2Biftt, aBifttleieit, wittioisms, itx gmit, quarrel, ih §nnttvcieii, tier glDaitg, constraint, ^ic gwaiigstmaftegctii, bcr giBtjl, dispute, dissension, Ut gloijligteittii, tic gtiitaljme, increase;, and some others. 2. Likewise the substantive-infinitives ithen, life, Sntfe^en, fright, ®ntjict;en, the coining into existence, Sntjiicten, rapture, bag Slnfe^en,. authority, dinhmmm, revenue, SScrge^cti, 25er» fi^tninben, disappearance, "oai Sinfe^en, insight, bag 9(ugfominen, competence, SSermiigeit, fortune, SScrtangen, desire, and some others ; for some of them plurals are taken from other abstract nouns of the same derivation ; as, SntjitcEungcn, SSergcl^ungen, misdemeanors, Sinfii^tett, t)te Sinna^men, receipts. Note. — Properly speaking, all abstract notions can Ije conceived only as singulars. Whenever an abstract noun is used in the plural, it has ceased to be a mere abstract; it has got at least a leaning towards concrete notions, and has, even in the singular, besides its abstract meaning, assumed a lateral concrete signification. Thus, gwifl meant originally the condition or state of quarrelling ; but later it has assumed also the lateral meaning of quarrel, a single quarrel- ling action, and may therefore have a plural, ^iviffigteiteu, quarrels. Thus most abstracts may in some way or other form a plural, but always with a leaning to concrete notions. With regard to those abstracts formed with the suffixes ting, Ijeit, fcljiift, U\t, nip, and e or t, that allow of a plural, the vocab- ulary must be consulted. The following abstract nouns admit of a plural in German, while the corre- sponding English do not: ©efc^iift, ®cfc|)afte, business ; (rtfadtmig, gifal)riiiigcn, experience; SSevloumbuttg, SScclaiimbuiigeii, slander; Oltebetttat^tigteit, 9liebet< tracfetigteitcii, baseness; Ungcret^tigteit, Uiigerccljtigtcitcn, injustice. Here belong the following phrases: in btv .{jofiuiiig (not plural) iljn )tl fcljtit, in hopes of seeing him ; cine UeberfcQung in SBccfcn, a translation in verse ; ■ eljMC Hmjfanbc, without ceremony ; ju JOrcn Sien|lcn, at your service; in Snglifd)en 3)isn(fen, in the English service. 3. Likewise most names of materials do not, as a rule, admit of a plural ; as, ber ©ant), sand, itv ©d)nee, snow, ber Mo1)\, cabbage, ber SfJlalj, malt, iai Dfcjl, fruit, bo3 ®(^ilf, reeds, baS Un!raut, weeds, ber SBeijeti/ wheat, bie ®er[le, bai-ley. When, however, different species of a genus are to be ex- THEOKETICAL PABT 207 pressed, the plural may be formed of almost any of these materials ; as, bic SBdffcr, waters, tie Unhauter, weeds, bte S^aue, dews, iic ®rafer, grasses, t>te ^o|Ie or ^oI)Iarten, cab- bages, bte Sftegen, rains. But of ©etraite the plural is always ©etraibearten ; of D6jl, DBjlarten. § 157. Words used only in the Plural. 1. Collective nouns implying a plurality of individuals : — (cttcrn, parents 'iHftn, Alps (the singular, tie ?f(pc, meaning Alpine pasture) SciiiMcitcr, •Sofeit, trousers, breeches (■&<)(< occurs sometimes as singular) ®c(!cii6£t, brothers ©cfdjlotffcr, brother and sister, brothers and sisters @(ic!)mafeii, limbs" teiite, people. 2. Collective nouns, without distinction of individuals : ■ — SBriefft^aftcii, letters SRniife, tricks giiituiifte, revenue 3l5tl)Eln, measles ©cfotte, rents ©portedi, fees ©erecjitfame, privileges Znbtx, lees ^cfleii, expenses, Xrummcr, ruins SHafetii, measles Xniypeii, troops (Xcitppe, sing., is hand) aUcltcii, -wheys 3eit(awftc, times. Also ^ie (JiiKtxjeit, finances. The five following originally expressed a plurality of days : — 3a(!cii, Lent ^?ao,^tn, Whitsuntide getieii, vacation aBeil)imcl)teit, Christmas. OflErii/ Easter 3. The following words are used in both plural and singular, but the corresponding English words are used only in the plural. bie aftljc, the ashes ta* (Seljirn, the brains 6aS '■iftdpift, the archives in fiafn, the oats tl)i;(tt, metaphysics ba* ©oiigelbanb, the leading-strings bie Cftii, optics 208 GERMAN GRAMMAR. 4 in SSScfjldrt, arrears tie SScrmnljluiig, -fujcfijeit, the nuptials He Sdjeeve, scissors bic ^angc, a pair of tongs bai O-uavtier, the quarters tie gittel, a pair of compasses, ba^ !8eclSt>ni^, the espousals § 158. The names of measures, numbers, and weights, when preceded, by numerals, do not assume the plural ; as, trei ®(^rttt lt»eit, three paces distant ; fiinf %vi^ Icing, five feet long ; fec^g ^aax ©i^u^e, six pairs of shoes ; fieBen ^funb, seven pounds ; ac^t ©U^e'nt, eight dozen ; ncutl ®tuc( Stepfet, nine apples ; ac^t* taufenb 9JJann, eight thousand men (of soldiers). And the object measured or weighed, when a material, does not allow of declension; as, cin ^funt) Qudix, elf 3)fuTtt)^affee. But when not a material, it allows, atleast, of a plural (Nom.) ; as, jc^n ©tiicC SBirnen ; tret Sentnet Stagel, three hundred-weight of nails. Feminine substantives, however, and names of measures of time and money, are excepted from this rule ; as, [ec^S Stteit Zu^, jwei g)arii« Seinwant, ftcljen SMeilen, fiinf 3a|re, fec^g ©tutttien, neun Slage, tier SBod^en, jwcl Momtt, fec^g ^fennlge, it^n !DoEar(S), fiinfjig Sent(g). The expression ti ijl ijicr U^r, " it is four o'clock," is ellip- tical, instead of eS ifl »icr on in U^r. Declension of Proper Names. § 159. Those proper names which are used only with the article, as, according to § 119. 7, the names of rivers, seas, lakes, mountains, and forests, and the names of countries of the mas- culine or feminine gender, are declined Uke common names. But the following rules are observed with regard to those proper names commonly used without the article ; that is, names of persons, places, and neuter names of countries. § 1 60. The feminines among them ending in e, and the males terminating in a sibilant (3, |, x, fi^, ?)) take en^ in the Genitive, and en in the Dative and Accusative singular ; while the for- mer have en, the latter c, in the Plural; as, 'Mavit, WlaxknS, 5Warien, bie Wlaxkn; $u^, .&ujfens, ^ujfen, tie §ujfe; Wtax, Mfixmi, '^axtn, tic Tlaxt. THEOEETIGAL PART. 209 § 161. All Other names of males and females have in the Genitive Singular i, in the -Dative and Accusative en or no termination, in the Plural e or 3 or no termination ; as, ^ax\, ^arl3, .Sarl(en), tie Mark; grtebric^, griebrii^g, grtebrii^ctt, bie 5nei)ri(i)e; SBerttja, SSert^a'^, SBert^'(n), bie S3ert^a«; ©eneca, ©encca'3, ®eneca'(tt), bie ©encca^ ; 3lmert!a, 3lmerito'g, SKmertlo, bte Slntertfa'g; 21^^"/ W^^^t W^^, '^^^ 5lften; SSertin, Serlins, SBerlin, bie ©erline. § 162. Foreign names ending in one of the unaccented termi- nations as, cS, is, US, take no terminations at all, but have re- course to the definite article; as, 3ter;:eS, beS, bent, ben, bie 38er= jres ; Sleneas, bcS, bent, ben, bte 3leneas ; SWacenaS, bes, bem, ben, bie SJJacenas (comically bie SJlaccnajJe, bie 3£erj:e|fe) ; J^emis, ber, ber, bie, bie 2;t)entiS ; ^autus, beS, bem, ben, bie 9)autuS (the Latin declension ^anli, |)auto, 9)aulum, and Sl^rij^uS, S^riflt, S!|rifio, St)ri|1unt is rather antiquated). The same expedient is employed even with names that can be inflected, for the sake of greater certainty as to the case pointed out ; as, bie 33riefe beS Sicero and bie 33tiefe Sicero'S ; Sr gie^t ®(^itlcr'(n) bent ®ot^e »or, he prefers Schiller to Goethe ; where an ambiguity is avoided. "When, however, the Genitive precedes the governing noun, this expedient is not resorted to ; as, ^(ato'S ©^riften, ©eneca'S Srauerfpiele, ©otra= teS' lob (the latter and similar forms being less agreeable and common, because the S of the Genitive cannot be heard in the pronunciation, and the apostrophe used in its stead can only be seen in reading). § 163. When proper names of places terminate in a sibilant, the Genitive cannot take an S, and a common name is placed in apposition before the proper noun, while the latter remains un- inflected ; as, bie Zl)on ber ©tabt faris ; ber 33efe'^Ist)a'6er ber Sejiung ^Jtainj, the commander of the fortress of Mayence. Or the preposition uon is resorted to; as, bie SE^ore Son ^'axiS ; ber 33efe^rs:^a6er son SUlainj ; bie Sage uon ©uej unb Sabiy, the situation of Suez and Cadiz. 18» 210 GERMAN GEAMMAR. Note 1. — This latter expedient has largely obtained even in words ■which do not terminate in a sibilant, so that the regular Genitive has become rather poetical; as, bic -^ctrft^ct ticii gvaiihcicl) (gtaiittric!)^ more poetical); bcr ^oiiig 6011 aSclgien; iet Saifet Son SRuflttiiS; itm ^onigreic^ ©panien iff gvantrcic^ iiHu (egen, France is superior to the Icingdom of Spain. NbTB 2. — The Latin form of the plural is partly retained in i'K @cipio> lien, Hi Sltxcnen, bte Cafateii. Note 3.^ Those in tl, en, et, take no termination in the plural; as, bie ©dplcgct, bie Qi^iUn, bie SStaiitcii (the three Franconias). Note i. — In the sayings, ©djittcr'^ (iiib ill .pdiife, the family of Schiller is at home; ©octlje'S fliib Oerreijf/ the Goethe family are from home; SJJSttcrV Ijaben SBefuc^, the Millers have visitors ; Itiir geljcit jcftt Jti ©cljmibt'*, we are going now to Smith's; — we have an ellipsis, yomsVy being omitted, and the i being the sign of a Genitive, not of a plural. § 164. When the name of a person is preceded by the definite article, with or without an adjective, or by a common noun, ex- pressing the person's title or occupation, the name of the person is not decHned ; as, tier ©(fitter, tieg ©chiller, bent, ben (Sc^lHer ; ber gro^e ®Det|e, beS, bent, ben gro^en ®otI)e ; bel Jlaifer^ 3o= fep:^, bent, ben ^aifer 2o^ip^ ; (ber) ^iinig ^arl. But when the Genitive precedes the governing substantive, this rule is departed from ; as, beg gro§en griebric^'S Z^atm, the great Frederick's deeds ; SDoftor Sutler's Siifi^gcfprdc^e, Dr. Luther's dinner-talks. The Christian name and the title in this case are not inflected ; as, Subtt)ig U|tanb'3 SaEaben ; 5tuguji UBil^elnt son ©(|Ieger« ©c^riften. CHAPTER V. ADJECTIVES. § 165. Adjectives single out an individual or a species among the different individuals or species belonging to a genus (the genus being expressed by the substantive), by attributing to the genus a single peculiarity ; as, the good man, a large house, fine peaches. THEOKETICAL PAKT. 211 § 166. "When this peculiarity is considered as inherent in the genus expressed by the substantive, we have an attributive Adjective, as in the above three examples ; when it is to be first ascribed to it, and has, therefore, the power of a verb, we Ijave & predicative Adjective; as, the man is good; a house may be large ; the peaches wiU, this year, be_^M«. § 167. The German has a different form for the attributive and for the predicative Adjective ; the latter, as a rule, has no termination, and is therefore susceptible of being used as an Adverb (§ 196). (Only the adjective ^Oi^, high, changes its Auslaut in the attributive form into ;^ot)er, e, ti.) The former are inflected by Gender, Number, and Case, and must always agree in the same with their substantives. The latter are never inflected. § 168. There are two different declensions which every at- tributive Adjective can undergo, the ancient and the modem. Ancient Declension. Masculine. Feminine. Nevter. JTIjU-KALi. M. F. N. Nominative. — ev — e — e« — e Genitive. —ti (( ;n) — er — ti (en) — er Dative. — em — er — em — en Accusative. — en — e —ti — e Modem Declension. SlNGULAB. Plubal. MasfyuUne. Feminine. Neuter. M. F. N. Nominative. — e — e — e — en Genitive. — en — en — en — en Dative. — en — en — en — en Accusative. — en — e — e — en I. Modern DecI/Ension op the Adjective. § 169. Adjectives take the modem declension, when pre- ceded by. an article, pronoun, or numeral which has a termina- 212 GERMAN GEAMMAE. tion of the ancient declension. In all other cases they are in- flected according to the ancient or mixed declension. Only the definite article ier, tie, tag, the pronouns biefer, Welijer, foli^cr, jener (this, which, that, such), berjenigc, that (which), berfelfee (the same), and the indefinite numerals, as manc^er (many a, many), Bieler (much, many), ttierttger (little, few), and the participle fotgenber (the following), are followed by the modem declension of the adjective. Masculine, M ber gutc Wann, G. bcs guten 9)^anncS, D. bem guten 9^anne, SiHGUIiAB. Feminine. bte gute grau, ber guten grau, ber guten grau, Neider. bag gutc ^tnb beg guten ^inbeg, bent guten ^nbe, A. ben guten SJZann, bie gutc grau. bag gute ^inb. Plukal. N. "blc guten SJldnncr, grauen, Mnber, G. ber guten SJlanner, grauert,^tnbcr, JD. ben guten 9Jiannern, Sraucn, ^inbern, A. bic guten iKanner, %xaxitv., Mnber. Note. — The law which underlies this double declension of the Adjective and its single forms is euphonic, — the definite article, and the above pro- nouns and numerals having already the forms of the ancient declension of the adjective, and sounds like itx giitcc 3llaim, iM giite^ £inb, bte gute 3>l>iniicr, Staiicii, ^iiibct, iti gutc* aitaiiiicef, SinSeS, ber gutec aUaimet, gt«ticit, Winter, being intolerable to the German ear. n. Ancient Declension or the Adjective. § 170. Adjectives not preceded by an article take this de- clension : — SlNGUIiAR. Feminine. Neuter. gute £uft, ' guteg S3rot, guter Suft, guteg(en) 58roteg, gutcr £uft, gutcm aSrotc, gute Suft. guteg S3rot. Masculine. K guter SKetn, G. guteg(ert) SCcincS, D. gutem ffiBeine, A. guten SBcin. THEORETICAL PAKT. 213 Plukal. iV. gute SBeine, fiiiftc, SBrotc, G. guter SBeine, Ciifte, SSrote, D. guten SBeinen, Suften, SBroten, A. gute 3Beitte, Siifte, SBrote. Note 1. — This form is not only in use with names of materials and nouns not preceded by an article or one of the pronouns, mentioned in \ 169, but also when a Genitive precedes the noun; as in mctne^ aSriiStr^ altcfler ©cljit iiiiS tUiiieS adatcljcn, my brother's eldest sou and little girl; ^arld iituec -Jjut iiitb dtte ^(ciScv. And likewise after one of the indefinite neuter numerals cttnarf, some, bic(, much, \\\i^ti, nothing, geiiug, enough, aQeclet, of all kinds, tmtxXtx, of one kind, tecgleidjeii, such like, foli^', such, (autec, mere, nothing but; and after the def- inite numerals jlBCi, two, titei, three, Dicr, four, etc. ; as, ctto** alter SBeiii/ bid f(tlctl>tm ^ft<^n, inoiid)' atmec aUaiiit, folc^' wtwti SSier; ijicc giite Kocfe, etc., mit gemtj fc|)5iicm Xudje, etc. Note 2. — On account of euphony gtiteii SBeineS/ gitten SSvctes; is preferred to gittett 2Bettiej/ gutett JSrote^. Still, the latter form is in use with good writers. Note 3. — The Nominative and Accusative of the neuter singular often drop their termination in poetry and common conversation ; as, gut SBvot, frif(l> SBajfet, fdjSii iffietter, fine weather, ©anj, whole, and Ijall), half, om(|t this ti always before names of countries and places without the definite article; as, gatt} ^ltg(all^, ()a(l> SRfm- But with the article: ba£i ganje gnglanb, tviDf l)«(l)e SRom. And so does at(', all, before a possessive or demonstrative pronoun; as, nlX' meiii ©eljneii, all my longing (see % 251). in. Mixed Ancient and Modern Declension. § 171. The indefinite article eirt, cine, ein, and the possessive pronouns metn, my, bein, thy, feiti, his, S^x, her, unfer, our, euer, your, i^r, their, '^x, your, and the numeral fettt, no, in the ' Nominative singular of all three genders, and in the Accusative singular of the neuter gender, are followed by the adjective in the ancient declension ; in all other cases, by the adjective in the modern declension. Singular. MascuUne. Fermmtie. Neuter. N. ein guter S8tann, etne gute grau, ein guteg ^inb, G. eineg gutenSJlanneg, ciner guten grau, cine3 guten ,$?iniieS, D. etncm guten SJJonne, einer guten grau, cinem guten .Slinbe, A. cinen guten SRann, eine gute grau. ein guteg .Kint). 214 GERMAN GKAMMAE. PLHRAIi. If. hint guten Scanner, grauen, Winter, G. letner guten Wdnntx, grauen, ^intier, J>. Ictnen guten Wanntxn, grauen, ^inbern, A. feine guten 9Jldnner, graucn, Winter. Note. — The reason underlying this naixed declension is, that the Naminative of ein< meiit, iiin, feiii, lliifer, tun, H)t, (ein, has (except the feminine) no termi- nation indicative of the gender and ulirenti, ijejiemtlib, proper, becoming ttl>(iopeiiS/ repulsive abii)ccl;fc(iib, clianging, varied al)lt>etd)eiib, different ablotfeitb, absent aiitvefenl), present atil)altent>, assiduous ttiimapeiii, arrogant onfptec!>tii6, aitjtcIieiiS, attractive aiiiletf ent>, contagious aiiffiil)renb, irritable oiijfttlleiib, striking auiimitni, persevering aMi[ii\veifmi, extravagant titbeiitenb, important tiefetStigciib, offensive iiejaiibeirnb/ enchanting brtngenb, pressing, urgent brfictciii, oppressive Siitdjbtiiigeiiti, piercing eiiineljmcnb, captivating empSreiib, revolting Clitfd)et&cii&, decisive cittfrrtcljenb, adapted ciitlButMgeiiS, degrading cntjHctcnS, ravishing fnlfclliS, interesting 19 getiugent), sufficient glaiiicnt), brilliant Ijiiivetf eii6, ravishing tmnteni, mortifying {abenb, refreshing lail)en!), smiling (oif cnb, enticing tafeiift, frantic rcijciib, charming fi^vecfenb, (in compounds) f(!)«)ebtiiK, suspended, continuing fpannenb, fascinating (iSrciib, troubling flbereijifitntmenb, harmonioui ul)erfii()reiib, convicting ubetjcugenb, convincing fibccrafc^eiib, surprising uberlDatttgenb, overpowering fiberlBttgenb, preponderant timfiiffenb, comprehensive iintei'baltenb, entertaining tintentfljinciiti, enterprising liiiW)t|7enb, ignorant Siwljecreiib, desolating 218 GERMAN GRAMMAR. l)ermf3ell^, wealthy oovljcvcfdjcilti, DemtegeiiS, predominant tU(fagen6, expressive iButljeiib, furious. Also some others, chiefly those compounded with nil, as iiitbefeuteiiti, with t5iieiit>, Kiiigciit, talttell^, as iwi)U {ubtU) tSiicnt, iKlIEliiigeiit), looljn«iiteii6, and with prepositions, as flbfcljrCifciiti, deterring. The past participle of those intransitive verbs which require the auxiliary verb l^abixi can be used neither in the predicative nor in the attributive connection ; such phrases as gejlanbencv SBcin, gefejfenea J^emb, being un-German. Still, gelcgen has in reality become an adjective, with the meaning opportune. And the following adjectives, originally participles of neuter and of transitive verbs, must be committed to memory ; as, etn berbtenter SO^ann, a deserving man; cin serfc^wiegcner, er= fa^^rener, unitBcrlegtcr (unfiebadjter), berbroijcner, unBe^otfener SJlenfc^/ a discreet, experienced, inconsiderate, listless, help- less man ; ein gele'^rtcS SBuc^, a learned book ; etn Sctrunfener, a drunken man ; etn gejierte^ SBeiB, an affected woman ; etn ent* ff^Ioffener 5!Jlenfd), a resolute man ; etn »erirrtc3 ©d)af, a strayed sheep ; (from the reflexive verbs, ftc^ Bctrtn!en, fid) giercn, fic^ cntf^tiefen, f"^ aerirren;) ein onsgeiienter ©olbat, a soldier who has served out his time. § 178. Both adjectives and participles can be used as substantives, always retaining, however, the declension of adjectives. The masculine and feminine are Used in both numbers (supplying in thought ber Tlann, tie grau) to denote male and female persons ; the neuter in the singular, to denote abstract notions in a general way. The German carries this practice to a far greater extent than the English. Examples: Ut iDeittfc^e/ the German, cine Seiitft^e, a German woman. Me Seiitfdjeit, the Germans; Me (8vofieii, nobles, distinguished persons; ciu ©tev> tlicljcr, a, mortal man ; Me (icteii iJBeifeii @vtec^)ell(all^fi(, the seven wise men of Greece ; cin Sicifcnber, a traveller ; tie Umficljciiticii, the bystanders ; ttt SlcScnbe, the speaker; cin ©elctjttev, tec @clcl)vte/ the (a) learned man; cin SSctitcntcu, bee ScMcntC/ the (a) servant; in SBeamtC, cin SBcamtcu, the (an) official; tier ©cfaiititc, cin ©cfanttev, the (an) ambassador; 6ev Si'cinisc, cin iStcm" ten, the fa) stranger; iet SIciite, cin fftcnbct, the (a) wretch; itx ©cfangene, cin ©efaiigciici:, the (a) prisoner; Set ©cifflidjc, ein (Scifllicljer, the (a) minister, clergy. THEORETICAL PART. 219 man; in ©ttitdte, eiit ©elirtttt, lover; in ©louMgt/ tin ®(aii()i3fv, believer, in tlnglaubtge, (in lliigltitiHger, infidel (but in fSitmbiin, creditor, is a substantive) ; in -ftcilige, eiii ^ciliget, saint; in Wnneiii^i, tin SHciiiciSiger, a perjurer; in SHitfdjulMgf, tin SMitfdpul^iger, accomplice; in Obn^e, eiii Ofcevjlsr, colonel; in @tn'nhiiiMge, cin @tecntull^igel;, astronomer; in S)evi>aniitC/ SBctlviefciie, em SBettoitfener, exile; in i8crft^iB0t«ie, etit SerfdjlDOVcncr, conspirator; tet SBtc« ^vall^tt, ein SBevll)an^tel■, the (a) relation; in iBetanntc, nn SSetainitcc, the (an) acquaintance. Some of these form the feminine, lilse cine QSctannte, fine SBct« Joanfcte, tine ©tleljtte, regularly; one by adding in, as. He, tine Sefanitin; a few have a separate feminine substantive; as, SSedientec, Sltagb, female servant. 2)aS (Siite, »as SdjSiie, ta* !IB«l)rc, the good, the beautiful, the true. .Jlaitgct tcin ©titcii an, cleave to that which is good. (B.) (Sto^ei !;«()( t()r in tiirjec geit geleiflec (5cfe.), you have done great things in a short time. 2Bet taitn barf aUSgdcde beredjiicii {(?.), who can calculate possibilities? SM SRotlKe), ®vi5n(e), ©c!)loavs(e), i3Bcig(e), etc., the red, green, black, white color; idi 9ltt(fe (9l«fJ uni tarf Xrocfeue, moist and dry lauds or things. Almost every adjective may thus be substantively used. § 179. When two or more adjectives are attributively joined to a substantive, all of them are decHned in the same way ; as, ber gute, arme, alte 5Rann ; ein tjiiBf^eS, mutS iBuc^ ; eine iungc, itette, ret3enbe %xau ; alter, ftarter, eiler 2Bein. Likewise two pronouns preceding a substantive do not affect each other; as, bag ^aui titefeg tneine^ SSaterS, the house of this my father ; m'it atlent unferem SErac^tett erreic^en wir'S nid)t, we do not gain our point with all our striving. Note. — The law of euphony does not consider this an infringement of 5§ 170 and 171, because, in pronouncing several adjectives (or pronouns) after each other, little pauses are observed between each pair of them, while articles and pronouns are connected with the adjectives following them without such a short interval of time. Comparison of Adjectives. § 180. When a quality is ascribed to a person or thing with- out any regard to other objects, the adjective stands in its fundamental form, called the positive degree ; as, ber Wlann t(l teid), the man is rich ; ^ixx St. ifi:. eirt retcfcer Tlann, Mr. N. is a rich man. When a quahty is ascribed to a person or thing in a compara- tive relation to other persons or things which have the same 220 GERMAN GKAMMAR. quality, the latter may be proper to both, in an equal degree, or in an unequal one. In the former case an improper Com- parative is used, which is formed, as in English, by adding certain particles to ihn Positive ; as, § err St. ijl fo reic^ atS (ganj fo retc^ ate, gerabe fo reic^ als) §crr iK., Mr. N. is as rich as (just as rich as) Mr. M. The same kind of comparative obtains, when two or more qualities of the same person or thing are ascribed to it in the same degree ; as, er t ji f o ebet ali Itug, he is as noble cm prudent ; — or when they are asserted only in different degrees ; as, er ijl ni(^t f o alt a I S ic^, he is not as old as I am ; — or when two qualities are predicated of two persons or things, one of each, but both in the same degree, or only in different degrees; as, er ifl fo iueife, u, he is wiser than thou. But when two qualities of the same person or thing are compared with each other, and one of them ascribed to it in a higher degree, the compoimd Comparative is used ; as, er ift nte^r gliicEUd^ aU toeife, he is more lucky than wise. § 182. The Comparative proper is never formed by placing nte^r, more, before the Positive, as in English, where adjec- tives not of Anglo-Saxon origin are thus transformed into the comparative. § 183. The Umlaut (a into a, O into 6, U into li, an into au) takes place in all comparatives proper, except those adjectives formed by means of preiixes and suffixes, — as gewanbt, skilled, cr^^aBen, elevated, ntunter, brisk, bunfel, dark, golben, golden, ru^ig, quiet, traurig, dreary, sad, — and the participles adjec- tively used, as lac^enb, — and the following : — THEOEBTICAL PAET. 221 fatt, satiated fc^at/ insipid ft^lajf, slaolc, languid fdjlaut, lanl:, slender fi(;[au, smart, sly fdjtoff/ rugged, rougli j!avv, stiif f!c(j, proud (irajf, tiglit, stretolied fimmm, tiglit, stretched flmnijf, blunt {littnm> mute tolt, mad taiif), deaf ton, full ii>al)r, true j(l(;m/ tame. fcdvft^, harsh twoiff, tight blaii, blue kljm, lame brfti), brate laf, tired bimt, variegatea (mit, loud biimiJf, dull, muiHed (ofc, loose fate, insipid, stale magsr, lean, meagre fiitb, fallow matt, wearied fal)(, fallow mocfi$, rotten, frail fttlfct), false uastt, naked flacb, flat ))(«tt, flat flan, insipid, dull, flat pdimp, clumsy frol), glad cafcj), quiols, rash glatt, smooth rtiiil), rough, raw grail, gray rol), rough, raw ()Ol)l, hollow riilib, round ^ol6, favorable facljt, slow fal;(, bald fmift, soft, gentle targ, stingy The practice varies with dang, afraid, M«f, pale, gerabe, straight, ftomm, pious, gentle, gefuiiS, sound, healthy, t(ar, clear, ii«fi, wet, j«rt, tender. Note. — The English language presents an analogy to this Vmlmtt in old, elder J eldest. § 184. The comparative when used as a predicate remains without inflection, like the predicative positive. But when used attributively, it assumes the declension of the adjective. For instance : ^evx S3, ijl iuetfer aU i^x, Mr. B. is wiser than you ; but ^crr S3, tfl tin tociferer SSlann, aU i^r, Mr. B. is a wiser man than you ; or ^err 33. t(i bet Jjjeifere (weifejle) Wann Uon eud^ beiben, Mr. B. is the wiser man of you two. Note. — The last example shows that the- German can also use the Superla- tive when only two persons or things are compared. What we said of the Positive holds good of the Comparative also (§ 170, Note 3), that the termination e3 of the Nominative and Accusative singular of the neuter is omitted sometimes in poetry as well as in common conversation ; as, feitt fi^oner (f(^6nere«) 33ilb fal§ tc^ in nteinem SeBen (G.), no finer picture ever saw I in my life ; — and that in poetry in the Genitive singular of the masculine and neuter the termination en is employed instead of eS ; as, tejferen SBeineg, fc^orferen ©aljeS (§ 170, Note 2.) 19* 222 GERMAN GRAMMAR. Note 1. Alut;ung, very young fdjiieewsi^, white as snow bliiftctl), red as blood fpiegetgtatt, smooth as & mirror ti^Hlt, cold as ice ficiiialt, very old fcbtvIcitOt, light as a feather ffcinljovt, hard as a stone fdfcnmcft, entirely naked, without (leiiireicl), enormously rich a rag of clotliing lltott/ very old fc(feiifc(l, firm as a rock uv))l5$lic!), very sudden feiievvctl), red as fire iirfdjlcdjt, very bad gatleiibittet, bitter as gall ttmiiterfd^Sn, wonderfully beautiful Ijoiiigffif, sweet as honey Smmtictlicblic^, very lovely to^(fd)iDari, black as coal jiictecfii^, sweet as sugar, tugelriliib, round as a ball etc. § 187. The Relative Superlative is formed, as in English, by adding to the root of the positive ft or ep:, the latter if the Aus- laut is b, t, i, f , fi^, 3, ^ (a sibilant), and giving the root the Umlaut (§ 183) in all cases where the comparative has it. It is declined like all adjectives when it is used attributively. For instance, bte rei(^ften Seutc ftttb nic^t itnmer bie gliicflii^ften, the richest people are not always the happiest ; ber tiirjefte Slag ; bie Iireiteften ©traf en ; IteBfter greunb ! Note. — The relative superlative may be strengthened by prefixing the Gen- jtive allev, of all; as, bet aHevteit^jle JKann, the richest man of all; Sa* atfcv f(|)5ii(le nJ!ii6c^eii, the finest girl of all. Uii6 man l)5tte bei .Jicf bie anerf(()5ii|im ©efrtiigc (ff.), the most beautiful songs were heard at court. The adjective (inerli«l)fi/ charming, has entirely lost this meaning of comparison. 224 GERMAN GRAMMAB. § 188. Only the following comparatives and superlatives are irregular in their formation : — Fosilive. Compa/ratine. Superlative. grop, great, grand, tall, grower, ber grofteor grofe^e, gut, good, fcejfer,* ber It^t, I}0(^, high, p:§er, ierpi^jle, na:§, nigh, near, neigh- na^er, ber noc^fle, boring, »iel, much, many, mtipce or tne^rcre,t in nteljle, jpemg, little, few, {"'fnW ber wenigfle, ( mtnber, bcr minbcjie. Note 1. The superlatire in cr(le, the first, is formed from ei), early, before, (comparative tljn, rather, before,) and the superlative in it^tt, the last, latest, (from the old (at, late, now out of use). From these two superlatives there are again formed new comparatives, in nfine, in (cfttcrt, the former, the latter. Note 2. The following adjectives, derived from adverbs of place, have the form of comparatives but the meaning of positives, and make the following superlatives ; — tet Siif ere (from ciuf en, outside), outer, exterior, in mipetile, the extreme, utmost, in iimcte (from tmicii, inside), inner, interior, in tnnecfte, iutime, inmost, in Ijiiitcve (from Ijtnteii, behind), hinder, ber t)inter(le, the hindmost, tier Dcrbere (from Dctii, fore), fore, in Mtinfe, the foremost, ber obete (from obtn, up), upper, bet obetffe, the uppermost, bev tiiitere (from iinten, down), under, bcr uiiterjie, the undermost, bee inittleie (from mitten, amidst), middle, bee mittelfie, the middlemost. Note 3. The adjectives with the Auslaiii e(, et, en, form the superlative regularly, as bcr ebeljle, ber miter(?c, bet gotbenfle. § 189. The Relative Superlative is never formed by adding an adverb, as in English, where most adjectives not of Anglo- Saxon origin form it by placing the most before the positive. The most unfortunate, the most successful, the most deserving, is, therefore, always translated by ungludlt^jle, bev erfolgreiii^j^c, ber BerbtettjlsoKjie. See, however, § 191, Note 1. * From an ancient positive, \>*^, good, which is still in use as an adverb if comic poetry, t mel;rece means se/oaral. THEORETICAL PART. , 225 § 190. There are some adjectives which do not admit of the formation of the comparative proper and the relative super- lative, because they express qualities that cannot be conceived of as increased or diminished ; as, tiJtt, dead, leBentig/ alive, jiumtn, dumb, tou'6/ deaf, BItnt)/ blind, leer, empty, rec^t, right, abelig, of noble birth, etngig, only, sole ; also some derived from adverbs of time and place, as ^eutlg, of to-day, morgent), of to- morrow, tiaftg, borttg, |iefig, aBcrmaltg, bamaltg, »orig, noc^^crig; and all expressive of materials, as fleinern, ^oljem, golbett. When, however, such adjectives assume a figurative signifi- cation, they also admit of the degrees of comparison, commonly implying a comical meaning ; as, ber leerfle Mop^, the emptiest head; fein 33etragen ioax lofjevner aU it, his behavior was more awkward than ever; totter olS tobt ; flutnnter ol^ eitt gif(^ ; tau'6er ali ctn ©tein ; BItnber aU ein ^effe ; iai etnjigfle SClal, the only one time. Only ret^t never admits of a compara- tive proper and relative superlative. § 191. Only such participles, present and past, admit of the formation of a comparative proper and relative superlative aa have entirely assumed the nature of adjectives. For the par- ticiples present, see the list in § 177 * ; of the past participles the following list is as complete as possible : — (abgeneigt), disinclined (Weftttcrcn, \ ftbgemi^t, worn out ttiiSetUfeii, V chosen, choice (ibgcfagt, renounced aueftvlealjlf, 3 aii^gelajfen, extravagant mipbuiHt, ) extended aitgefel;en/ distinguished aniitietiM, I anjegtilffit, aileoted, wealsened aiiSgejcitljiiet, excellent angcmeffen, fit, apt nufgetlttrt, enlightened aiiftcKafcit, haughty, vainglorious aitfgeraumt, j [,j.;g,j jj^^, (Hifgetegt, excited aufytivittt, i ' ■' ' ° ■' * Of the whole list there given, only univerent and ablvefent can undergo, on account of their meaning, no comparison. But all of them are adverse to a comparative in attributive use, like eiii rcijeiiSerc* S8tlt> (see § 184, Note 2). On the other hand, the relative superlative of these participles may be used both attributively and predicatively; as, iai rtijeiiDjle SBitD, Sieft^ SBil!) i)l tmi teijenifie. 226 GEK3MAN GKAMMAE. bcbmtt, cultivated' befrcunftet, friendly kcgabt, gifted tegliicf t/ blessed begcenjt, limited ( begfitctt), -wealthy (beljoftet), afflicted with (bcljerit), courageous (dcjaljrt)/ aged (betaimt), known beMoinmen/ oppressed betfunmert, sorrowful (belefen), versed in books bclcbt, enlivened (bcHtbt), cherished (bcmttttit), wealthy (benlctltigt), famous bec*i()mt> celebrated (bivebt)/ eloquent befoniten, prudent btfcfeii/ tipsy beforgt/ apprehensive, careful befcl)affeii, qualified, o^a kind befc^nftigt, occupied, busy bcflimmt, definite, certain beftidjt, visited, frequented befci)raii((> limited betriinCen, inebriated bebSltett, peopled (bcmaiibert), versed bctvobiit/ inhabited belmmtert, admired bMt)a()rt, tried biircljbadjt, well pondered biircbtciebeii, cunning entattet, degenerated entferntf distant (etlt(cgen), remote entfitjitien, decided «iitfcl)lci(f«ii, resolute entbUtett, depopulated ciitlutif t(t, developed entinitt, ravished etbittcrt, etbofl, angry ecfal;r(ii, experienced etgcbeit, devoted ecgrtffen, touched erbaben> elevated, sublime crleudjtet, enlightened er)>robt, tried f(>ct3efd)ctttcn,progreasive, advanced gebilbct, educated gcbmibcn, tied, fettered gebrSiigt, crowded gcbicgeit (from gcbtiljen), genuine geeljrt, honored gefaf t/ ge(a{fen, collected, composed gelegeit/ opportune ge(el)rt, learned getiebt, beloved, cherished gcdingen, well done gemn^tgtf moderate gemtfcbt, mixed up gcneigt, inclined gecatbcit/ advisable gtfeftt, grave (gefc^itt t), skilful (geftttet), moral, decent gefixinnt/ intense gefuc^t/ sought for gefibtf practised gelmuibm, winding geivobiit, accustomed gciBOgcii, favorable ubereilt, rash ubcrlabcii, overfraught (ubeclcgcn), superior iibcctciebeitf excessive uberUgt, well reflected on iiiibefangtn, free, unbiased uiibe|?ectt, unblemished (uiibefiigC)/ illicit iiiibel;olfen, clumsy iinbctannt, unknown (iinbefdjotteit), untarnished «nbef*t«i,tf, U„ii^t^a unetngefipranrf, ) inietl)6rt, untold, unheard of unecfd^tocCen, intrepid uneirtnartet, unexpected ttneciniefen, not proven iliigtjogcn, ill-bred THEOEETICAL PART. 227 imgjdimlseit, frank, unfettsred imgcgrfmbet, unfounded «iigc()a(teit, angi-y lingcljinbtvt, free, frank iingeveimt, absurd xmgcfldlttt, I misshapen, de- (uiigcfdjUcljt), J formed Hitgefdjlifcii, ill-mannered »ingc|l?vt, undisturbed tiiigejfviingeii, unconstrained unfitietfegt^ inconsiderate liniimWuutien, unceremonious uiibertiorbeji/ uncorrupted iliii>ec(coffi!n, indefatigable iin6ctl)ecfd)amt, impudent iiinjcrfc()ii[6et, undeserved tiniJfrjagt, unterrified tiltterbcuttf, oppressed Detiiiibect, changed i>m